Konica Minolta Printer 7130 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this book.  
Konica 7022/7130/7135  
Workgroup Document System™  
User's Manual  
ENERGY STAR® Program  
The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the  
widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce  
energy consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner,  
Konica Corporation, Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY  
STAR guidelines for energy efficiency, based on the following features.  
Auto Low Power  
This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto  
Low Power operates automatically when 1 minute has elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier  
remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.  
The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30  
minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes. See p. 2-12 for details.  
Automatic Shut-Off  
This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning the power supply OFF, thereby reducing  
energy consumption to 20W or less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power,  
operating automatically when 1 minute (machine without options) / 15 minutes (machine with options) have  
elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.  
The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120  
minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 2-12 for details.  
Automatic Duplex Copying  
To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex) copies, automatically.  
We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic Shut-Off function, and the Automatic  
Duplex Copying function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2002 by Konica Business Technologies, Inc.  
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT:  
The KONICA 7022/7130/7135 Workgroup Document System™ will give you many years of trouble-free service.  
To ensure high-quality copying performance and to prevent premature wear or failure of precision parts and  
components, schedule periodic cleaning and routine adjustments.  
We recommend that you contact your service center to discuss the benefits and advantages of Konica's  
Customer Service Maintenance Agreement and to be shown how a maintenance plan can be tailored to your  
individual copying needs.  
NOTICE:  
Konica Business Technologies, Inc. has made every effort to ensure that the information in this manual is  
complete and accurate. However, constant efforts are also being made to improve and update the product.  
Therefore, Konica Business Technologies, Inc. shall not be liable for errors in this manual or for any  
consequential damage resulting from the use of this manual. The information contained herein is subject to  
change without notice.  
FEDERAL OR STATE STATUTES MAY PROHIBIT THE COPYING OF CERTAIN DOCUMENTS OR  
INFORMATION, RESULTING IN FINES OR IMPRISONMENT FOR VIOLATORS.  
MANUAL PART NUMBER:  
OP-7022/7130/7135-02  
Web Site Address:  
http://www.konicabt.com  
CORRESPONDENCE:  
Correspondence regarding this manual may be mailed to the address shown below.  
KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.  
CORPORATE PUBLICATIONS  
500 DAY HILL ROAD  
WINDSOR, CT 06095  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Contents  
Contents  
2
Machine  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135  
Information  
Basic  
3
Copying  
Operations  
1
Safety  
Section 1: Safety Information  
Information  
Caution Labels and Indicators ............................................................................1-2  
4
Regulations.........................................................................................................1-4  
FCC Regulations..................................................................................................... 1-4  
FDA Regulations..................................................................................................... 1-4  
Requirements for Safe Use.................................................................................1-5  
Power Source.......................................................................................................... 1-5  
Environment............................................................................................................ 1-6  
Precautions for Routine Handling ........................................................................... 1-9  
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
2
Machine  
Section 2: Machine Information  
Information  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
Machine Configuration........................................................................................2-2  
External Machine Items .......................................................................................... 2-2  
Internal Machine Items ........................................................................................... 2-4  
Standard/Optional Equipment................................................................................. 2-5  
Basic Screen........................................................................................................... 2-6  
Control Panel Layout............................................................................................... 2-8  
7
Advanced  
Information  
Turning On the Power Switch..............................................................................2-9  
To Turn On the Power ............................................................................................. 2-9  
To Turn Off the Power ........................................................................................... 2-11  
Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power)..................................... 2-12  
Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off)............................................................ 2-12  
Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually......................................................... 2-13  
Entering an ECM Password (ECM)....................................................................... 2-14  
Loading Paper...................................................................................................2-15  
Loading Paper in Main Body Trays and DB-210 Trays.......................................... 2-15  
Loading Paper in DB-410 Tray.............................................................................. 2-17  
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ........................................................... 2-18  
8
Applications  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
Changing Paper Size of Main Body Trays and DB-210 Trays...........................2-19  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
i
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents (continued)  
3
Copying  
Section 3: Copying Operations  
Operations  
Positioning Originals ...........................................................................................3-2  
Positioning Originals in RADF................................................................................. 3-2  
Positioning Original on Platen Glass....................................................................... 3-5  
Setting Print Quantity..........................................................................................3-7  
To Set Print Quantity............................................................................................... 3-7  
To Change Print Quantity........................................................................................ 3-7  
Selecting Copy Size............................................................................................3-8  
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS).............................................................. 3-8  
To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) .................................................................. 3-10  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) ......................................................3-12  
To Copy in 1.00 Magnification Mode..................................................................... 3-12  
To Copy in Fixed Magnification Mode (RE)........................................................... 3-13  
To Copy in Zoom Mode......................................................................................... 3-14  
Selecting Density Level.....................................................................................3-16  
To Select Copy Density......................................................................................... 3-16  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2)........................................................3-18  
Using RADF.......................................................................................................... 3-18  
Using Platen Glass ............................................................................................... 3-20  
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2a1) ....................3-22  
Copying Using Memory ....................................................................................3-24  
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode)....................................................... 3-24  
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve)...................................................................... 3-27  
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job List Screen)........................................... 3-29  
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher .......................................................3-31  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher ............................................................3-34  
Output Mode for Machine with IT-101...............................................................3-38  
Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying .............................................3-41  
Interrupt Copying ..............................................................................................3-44  
4
Job Memory  
Section 4: Job Memory & Help Mode  
&Help Mode  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)...............................................4-2  
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)...................................4-6  
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)..........................................4-8  
To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen ............................................................ 4-8  
To Display Help Screen from Other Screens ........................................................ 4-10  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Contents (continued)  
2
Machine  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
Information  
Section 5: Troubleshooting  
When “Call for Service” Message is Displayed...................................................5-2  
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble....................................................................... 5-3  
Preventive Maintenance .....................................................................................5-4  
Clearing Mishandled Paper.................................................................................5-5  
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key ..................................................................5-7  
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key .....................................................5-9  
3
Copying  
Operations  
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)......................5-10  
Action 1................................................................................................................. 5-10  
Action 2................................................................................................................. 5-11  
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed ......................................................5-12  
Troubleshooting Tips.........................................................................................5-13  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
6
Machine  
Section 6: Machine Specifications  
Specifications  
Main Body Specifications....................................................................................6-2  
Option Specifications..........................................................................................6-5  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
7
Advanced  
Information  
8
Applications  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
iii  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents (continued)  
Advanced  
7
Advanced  
Section 7: Advanced Information  
Information  
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) ...............................................................7-2  
Rotation ..............................................................................................................7-4  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode...........................................................................7-6  
8
Applications  
Section 8: Applications  
To Display Application Selection Screen.............................................................8-2  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) ........................................8-3  
Positioning Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)...........................................8-8  
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)....................................8-11  
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)........................................8-14  
Copying onto Transparency Films (Transparency)............................................8-17  
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ............................................8-20  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy)...............................8-23  
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original).................................................8-28  
Copying Folded Original (Folded Original)........................................................8-31  
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Non-Standard Size) ............................8-34  
Reverse the Second Side in 1-2 Mode (Upside Down) ....................................8-36  
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance).......................8-39  
Reversing Color in Black and White Image (Reverse Image)...........................8-42  
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)..........................8-44  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)...............8-47  
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)................8-51  
Copying Image in the Center of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)............................8-54  
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)................................................8-57  
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)............................8-60  
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase).................................8-63  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)...................................8-66  
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)..................8-71  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Contents (continued)  
2
Machine  
9
Paper &  
Section 9: Paper and Original Information  
Original Info  
Information  
Paper Information ...............................................................................................9-2  
Paper Weight .......................................................................................................... 9-2  
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity........................................................................................... 9-3  
Paper Size............................................................................................................... 9-4  
Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray .............................................................. 9-5  
To Store Copy Paper............................................................................................... 9-5  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Original Information ............................................................................................9-6  
Platen Glass Originals ............................................................................................ 9-6  
RADF Originals....................................................................................................... 9-7  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
10  
Maintenance  
Section 10: Maintenance & Supplies  
& Supplies  
5
Trouble-  
Adding Toner.....................................................................................................10-2  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher ....................................10-5  
shooting  
Cleaning Image Scanning Section....................................................................10-9  
Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover............................................................. 10-9  
Cleaning the RADF............................................................................................. 10-10  
Cleaning Image Printing Section ....................................................................10-12  
Checking Copy Count.....................................................................................10-14  
Maintenance, Repairs, Supplies .....................................................................10-15  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
7
Advanced  
Information  
11  
Key Operator  
Section 11: Key Operator Mode  
Mode  
How to Access the Key Operator Mode............................................................11-2  
To Display the Key Operator Mode Screen........................................................... 11-2  
8
Applications  
[1] System Initial ...............................................................................................11-4  
[1] Time................................................................................................................. 11-4  
[2] Language......................................................................................................... 11-6  
[2] Copier Initial.................................................................................................11-7  
[1] Copy Mode....................................................................................................... 11-8  
[2] Density............................................................................................................. 11-9  
[3] Magnification.................................................................................................. 11-10  
[4] Tray ................................................................................................................ 11-11  
[5] Output ............................................................................................................ 11-12  
[6] Non-Image Erase........................................................................................... 11-14  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
10  
[3] Preset Key .................................................................................................11-15  
[1] Density........................................................................................................... 11-15  
[2] Magnification.................................................................................................. 11-17  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
v
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents (continued)  
Section 11: Key Operator Mode (continued)  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) ..............................................................11-18  
How to Access the ECM Setting Mode ............................................................... 11-19  
[1] Change ECM Data......................................................................................... 11-20  
[2] ECM Data List................................................................................................ 11-22  
[3] All Counter Reset........................................................................................... 11-24  
[4] ECM On/Off Setting ....................................................................................... 11-25  
[5] Copy Limit Reached Effect............................................................................. 11-26  
[5] Lock Job Memory ......................................................................................11-27  
[6] Paper Type.................................................................................................11-28  
[7] Panel Contrast ...........................................................................................11-29  
[8] Key Operator Data .....................................................................................11-30  
[9] Weekly Timer.............................................................................................11-31  
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode ................................................. 11-32  
[1] Weekly Timer Setting..................................................................................... 11-33  
[2] Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set........................................................ 11-34  
[3] Machine Working Day Individual Set ............................................................. 11-36  
[4] Lunch Hour Off Function................................................................................ 11-38  
[5] Password Setting ........................................................................................... 11-39  
[10] Touch Panel Adjustment ..........................................................................11-40  
[11] Power Save..............................................................................................11-41  
[12] Memory Switch........................................................................................11-42  
[13] List Print...................................................................................................11-47  
[14] Application Customize .............................................................................11-48  
[15] Density Shift.............................................................................................11-49  
[16] KRDS Host ..............................................................................................11-50  
Index  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135  
• AES - Automatic Exposure Selection  
Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original.  
2
Machine  
Information  
• AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection  
Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Copy Size is selected  
manually. Automatically selected when the AMS key is touched.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
• APS - Automatic Paper Selection  
Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.  
• ATS - Automatic Tray Switching  
4
Job Memory  
Automatically switches tray to allow copying to continue without interruption if the  
selected tray empties while copying is in progress.  
&Help Mode  
• Auto Layout  
The original image on the platen glass or in the document feeder is copied and  
centered on a sheet.  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
• Auto Low Power  
Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.  
6
Machine  
• Auto Reset  
Specifications  
Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity.  
• Auto Shut-Off  
Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity.  
7
Advanced  
Information  
• Book Copy  
Copies both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately onto two letter  
sheets in 1a1 mode or separately onto each side of one letter sheet in 1a2 mode.  
You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or Front/Back cover mode. The cover  
page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on  
the other pages.  
8
Applications  
• Booklet  
9
Paper &  
Creates letter R or ledger size booklets from letter size originals in 1a2 or 2a2 copy  
Original Info  
mode.  
• Chapter  
Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only  
duplex mode (1a2 or 2a2) is compatible with this feature.  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
vii  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135 (continued)  
• Combination  
Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper to create a  
draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving paper.  
• Copy Density  
Manually selects up to 9 density levels.  
• Copy Mode  
Selects the desired simplex mode (1a1 or 2a1); or duplex mode (1a2 or 2a2).  
• Counter List  
Displays on the screen and prints the following data: total counter of the machine,  
copier counter, print counter and the date when the counter started.  
• Density Shift  
Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Increase  
Contrast) to three levels lighter or three levels darker.  
• Folded Original  
This feature sets the RADF to accept folded originals.  
• Frame/Fold Erasure  
Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 15mm), Fold (1 - 30mm), or  
Frame & Fold.  
• Image Insert  
Stores pages in memory from the platen glass, and inserts the pages into a document  
copied from the document feeder.  
• Image Shift  
Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges (shift  
amount from -250mm ~ +250mm, in 1mm increments); reduces image to prevent image  
loss (reduce & shift amount from -250mm ~ +250mm, in 1mm increments).  
• Interrupt Copying  
Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of the copier  
features for the interrupt job.  
• Job List  
Displays the Job List Screen to view the current machine status, changes the opera-  
tion order of reserve jobs, or deletes the unused reserve job.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135 (continued)  
• Job Memory  
Programs up to 15 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. All compatible  
platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after they are  
selected.  
• Lens Mode (RE, Zoom)  
Selects fixed ratios, three reduction, three enlargement, and three user-set ratios.  
Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments.  
• Machine Status Confirmation  
Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation.  
• Manual Shut-off  
Shuts off the machine’s power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the  
control panel.  
• Mixed Original  
Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS  
automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select  
one paper size for all originals.  
• Non-Image Area Erase  
When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copies only  
the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as  
black.  
• Non-Standard Size  
Identifies the special original size which the 7022/7130/7135 cannot detect, in order to  
select the optimal paper size for copying or printing.  
• Output Mode for Machine with FS-107 Finisher Installed:  
Non-Sort, Sort, Staple, and Group modes using the two exit trays (or three/four exit  
trays including optional FT-107 tray)  
Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.  
• Output Mode for Machine with IT-101 Inner Tray Installed:  
Non-Sort, Rotation sort, Rotation group, and Group modes using the two exit trays  
Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.  
• Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed:  
Non-sort, Rotation sort, Rotation group, and Group modes  
Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135 (continued)  
• Paper Capacity  
Total 1,050 sheets in the machine with DK-109 desk, including a 50-sheet Multi-sheet  
bypass tray.  
Total 2,050 sheets in the machine with DB-209/210 drawer, including four 500-sheet  
trays and a 50-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray.  
Total 2,550 sheets in the machine with DB-409/410 drawer, including a 1,500-sheet  
tray and a 50-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray.  
• Platen Memory  
Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder and  
inserts the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an  
incompatible function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected,  
and an Error message will be displayed.  
• Power Saver  
Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier  
inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by  
pressing the power switch on the control panel.  
• Proof Copy  
To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by touching  
PROOF COPY on the Check Screen.  
• Repeat  
Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down the page as  
many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150mm) permits in manual or auto.  
• Reserve  
Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the machine is busy printing or copying.  
• Reverse Image  
Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa.  
• Rotation  
Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation of the origi-  
nal is different from the orientation of the copy paper.  
• Rotation Exit (Rotation Sort / Rotation Group)  
When IT-101 Inner Tray or no Finisher is installed, Rotation Exit alternately switches  
the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray.  
Be sure to load both 8.5”x11” and 8.5”x11”R in separate trays (including the Multi-  
sheet bypass tray) before selecting this feature.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of the Konica 7022/7130/7135 (continued)  
• Sheet/Cover Insertion  
Insert up to 15 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass  
tray, or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi-  
sheet bypass tray to enhance the presentation of multi-page documents.  
• Stamp  
Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numbering onto the  
output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of the copies.  
• Staple  
Selects the stapling position and number of staples.  
• Text/Photo Enhance  
Enhances photo image in Photo mode, regular image in Text/Photo mode, text image  
in Text mode, lighter image in Increase Contrast mode.  
• Transparency Interleave  
Copies onto transparency film and interleave blank or copied paper for each original  
copied.  
• Upside Down  
1-2 Upside Down arranges the even pages of the simplex originals upside down on  
the reverse side of duplex copies.  
Similarly, 2-1 Upside Down rearranges the reverse side of duplex originals which  
reads upside down to make normal simplex copies.  
• Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2)  
Outputs up to 16 density samples on a total of 4 pages that display 4 samples per  
page, then programs the desired density under USERSET 1 and/or USERSET 2.  
• Weekly Timer  
Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main body power  
Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enables the Timer  
Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is  
in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
2
Machine  
Information  
Basic  
3
Copying  
Operations  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Safety Information  
Precautions for Installation and Use  
1
Caution Labels and Indicators.................................................................1-2  
Regulations .........................................................................................1-4  
Requirements for Safe Use .....................................................................1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution Labels and Indicators  
The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as shown below,  
where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or  
serious injury.  
High  
Température  
élevée!  
¡Temperatura  
alta!  
No tocar. Tenga  
cuidado al remover  
el papel.  
Alta  
CAUTION  
temperature!  
Do not touch. Use  
temperatura!  
Risque de brûlure.  
Não toque! Tenha  
cuidado ao remover  
o papel.  
care when clearing Soyez prudent en  
paper.  
retirant la feuille  
coincée.  
The fixing unit is  
very hot.  
To avoid getting  
burned, DO NOT  
TOUCH!  
WARNING  
This area generates  
high voltage. If  
touched, electrical  
shock may occur. DO  
NOT TOUCH!  
CAUTION  
Burns or injury may occur from touching the areas detailed in  
the caution labels and caution indicators. Do not remove  
caution labels or indicators. If any caution label or caution  
indicator is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot  
make them legible, or if the caution label or indicator is  
damaged, please contact your service representative for  
replacement labels.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Caution Labels and Indicators (continued)  
The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to categorize  
the level of safety cautions.  
DANGER:  
Action liable to cause death or serious injury.  
WARNING:  
Action likely to cause death or serious injury.  
CAUTION:  
Action liable to cause minor injury, machine trouble or physical damage.  
If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or  
reading the manual, be sure to follow the information.  
Reminder!  
If the safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc.,  
please procure a new copy from your service representative.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regulations  
FCC Regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to part 15 of FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.  
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the circuit to which the  
receiver is connected.  
• Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Canadian Department of Communications Regulations  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
FDA Regulations  
This Copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.Department of Health  
and Human Service (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation  
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this printer is  
completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam  
cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Requirements for Safe Use  
To ensure your safe use of the machine, you are required to observe the following  
precautions without fail for the machine’s power source and during installation and  
routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them.  
Power Source  
CAUTION: Plug Socket  
• A socket is limited in capacity. Use only a power source with the correct rating for  
the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or overheating may  
occur.  
• Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors.  
CAUTION: Power Plug and Cord  
• Be sure to insert the power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an accident  
may occur as a result of smoking or overheating. If the inserted power plug is loose  
in the socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect the plug and  
contact your electrical contractor.  
• For plug cable equipment, the outlet must be near the equipment and easily  
accessible.  
• Do not bend or crush the power cord. If your copier power cord is bent or damaged  
in any way, contact your service representative immediately. Do not attempt to repair  
it yourself, and do not continue to operate the copier. A damaged power cord may  
result in overheating, short circuit, or fire.  
• Do not bundle or coil the power cord of the copier. Otherwise an accident may occur  
as a result of overheating or fire.  
CAUTION: Connecting Multiple Loads to One Outlet Prohibited  
Never connect multiple loads to one outlet using a multi-outlet extension cord or  
branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire.  
CAUTION: Extension Cord  
An extension cord must never be used with this machine.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
Environment  
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire  
Do not install near flammable materials, curtains or  
volatile combustibles, that can catch or cause fire.  
CAUTION: Prevention of Short Circuit  
Do not install the copier where it could be splashed  
with rain water, or water from a tap, to avoid a  
short circuit.  
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity  
• Keep away from direct sunlight, heat sources  
such as stoves, cool air from an air conditioner  
and hot air from a heater.  
• Avoid any environment that is outside the range  
shown below:  
50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C) in temperature  
10 to 80% in humidity  
CAUTION: Ventilation  
• Install the machine in a well-ventilated place.  
• Keep away from dust or corrosive gases. These materials may cause poor image quality.  
• During use, the machine generates ozone in an insufficient amount to cause any  
hazard to the human body.  
However, if the machine is used in a poorly ventilated room, many copies are made,  
or more than one copier is used at the same time, an odor may be detected. Ensure  
adequate ventilation for a comfortable working environment.  
CAUTION: Vibration  
Do not install on a floor which is subject to vibration or is  
not level.  
CAUTION: Transportation  
Be sure to contact your service representative when  
moving or transporting the machine. If you move the  
machine Memory unit installed, machine trouble may be  
caused by vibration.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
CAUTION: Installation Space  
Allow sufficient space to facilitate copy operation, changing parts, and periodic  
inspection. Leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the  
rear fan.  
Unit: inches (mm)  
7.9  
(200)  
21.7  
3.9  
(100)  
21.6  
(550)  
23.4  
(595)  
(550)  
22.8  
(580)  
19.7  
(500)  
26.1  
(662)  
60.0  
(1524)  
10.6  
(269)  
38.3  
(974)  
46.4  
(1180)  
52.9  
(1345)  
Main body + DK-109  
Unit: inches (mm)  
7.9  
23.4  
(595)  
21.7  
(550)  
19.7  
(500)  
(200)  
9.9  
(252)  
21.6  
(550)  
22.8  
(580)  
26.1  
(662)  
60.0  
(1524)  
32.1  
(815)  
10.6  
(269)  
38.3  
(974)  
44.4  
(1127)  
52.9  
(1345)  
52.4  
(1332)  
Main body + DF-314 + IT-101 + DB-410  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
Unit: inches (mm)  
7.9  
(200)  
21.7  
(550)  
23.4  
(595)  
21.6  
(550)  
17.7  
(450)  
22.8  
(580)  
19.7  
(500)  
60.0  
(1524)  
26.1  
(662)  
10.6  
(269)  
38.3  
(974)  
44.4  
(1127)  
32.1  
(815)  
52.9  
(1345)  
60.2  
(1530)  
Main body + DF-314 + DB-210 + FS-107 + FT-107  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
Precautions for Routine Handling  
WARNING: High Voltage  
DO NOT TOUCH the high voltage parts indicated with WARNING label or described  
in the manual.  
CAUTION: Actions in Response to Troubles  
• If the Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued,  
stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the report code  
(stated on the 2nd line of the message), then switch off the copier and disconnect  
from the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the  
report code.  
• Do not touch high temperature parts indicated with CAUTION labels or described in  
the manual.  
• Do not touch the inside of the machine for any purpose other than removing jammed  
paper or adding toner.  
• If machine repair is necessary, be sure to contact your service representative. Never  
attempt to repair it by yourself.  
• If any abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop  
using it, turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug and contact your ser-  
vice representative.  
• If the breaker trips or the fuse blows, turn off the power switch, reset the breaker or  
the fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your  
service representative.  
• Ensure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never  
use a fuse with an incorrect rating.  
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire  
Do not use volatile combustibles, such as thinner or alcohol, near the machine.  
CAUTION: Prohibition of Machine Modification  
Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
CAUTION:Prevention of Machine Troubles  
• Do not drop small metallic objects, such as paper clips  
or staples, inside the machine.  
• Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a vase,  
books or ornaments on the machine.  
CAUTION: Recommendation of Periodic Check  
Be sure to periodically check the following:  
(1) The main cord or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat.  
(2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the cord is not cut or scratched.  
(3) The grounding wire is correctly connected.  
(4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust.  
If you find anything abnormal with the above items, stop using the machine and  
contact your service representative.  
CAUTION: Toner  
• Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you  
inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice.  
• Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire the toner  
may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.  
CAUTION: Paper  
Check copy paper to be sure it conforms to the specifications outlined in Section 9.  
• Do not use paper with any staples left, or paper that conducts electricity (silver,  
carbon, etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire.  
• To avoid machine trouble, do not use heat-sensitive paper, paper that conducts  
electricity (silver, carbon, etc.), or colored OHP film.  
CAUTION: Power Saver and Weekly Timer  
• In Power Saver mode, the copier is still connected to the main power supply and  
power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected  
troubles, turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time.  
• When the Weekly Timer function is operating, turning power OFF will disable the  
function.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Safety  
Information  
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)  
CAUTION: Fixing Unit  
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be  
careful when withdrawing the fixing unit.  
WARNING: Drum Unit  
The internal drum unit generates a high voltage.  
To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH.  
CAUTION: Disposal of Copier  
Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your service representative, who can  
arrange for its safe disposal.  
If you change the place of installation, please contact your service representative.  
CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray  
The exit tray capacity is max. 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is required,  
be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is  
reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam.  
CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the IT-101 Inner Tray  
The IT-101 Inner Tray is equipped with two exit trays.  
Select an exit tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.  
To prevent paper misfeed, do not exceed the paper capacity of the Inner tray.  
When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the capacity stated in Sec-  
tion 9, be sure to unload the exit tray while the copier is still copying. Failure to do so  
will cause the copier to jam.  
CAUTION: FS-107 Finisher Paper Capacity  
The FS-107 Finisher is equipped with two exit trays, which may be increased to three  
or four trays by installing the optional FT-107 Finisher Tray(s).  
Select an exit tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu.  
To prevent paper misfeed, do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher.  
When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the capacity stated in Sec-  
tion 9, be sure to unload the exit tray while the copier is still copying. Failure to do so  
will cause the copier to jam.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Machine  
Information  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Loading  
Paper  
Machine Information  
Machine Configuration, Turning On the  
Power and Loading Paper  
Changing  
Paper Size  
2
Machine Configuration ............................................................................2-2  
Turning On the Power Switch .............................................................2-9  
Loading Paper .......................................................................................2-15  
Changing Paper Size of Main Body Trays and DB-210 Trays ...........2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration  
External Machine Items  
1 Platen cover (option)  
2 RADF (option)  
19 Control panel  
18 LCD touch screen  
17 Power switch  
3 Work table (Option)  
16 Finisher (FS-107)  
(option)  
4 Key counter  
15 Front door  
(Option)  
of Finisher  
14 Front door  
5 Multi-sheet  
bypass tray  
of main body  
13 Main power switch  
6 Right side door  
of Main body  
7 Tray 1  
8 Tray 2  
9 Right side door  
of Drawer base  
Left rear side  
of main body  
10 Tray 3  
11 Tray 4  
DB-210  
9 Right side door  
of Drawer base  
DK-109  
10 Tray 3  
12 Storage  
DB-410  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
1 Platen cover (option) covers documents to be copied and holds them in place.  
2 RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) (option) automatically feeds  
2
Machine  
multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying.  
Information  
3 Work table (option) provides a convenient workspace for documents both before  
Machine  
Configuration  
and after copying.  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
4 Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine.  
5 Multi-sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or  
Loading  
Paper  
special paper.  
6 Right side door of main body opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or  
Changing  
Paper Size  
cleaning the transfer/separator electrode wire.  
7 Tray 1 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 8.5"x14"/  
8.5"x11"/8.5"x11"R or 5.5"x8.5"R.  
8 Tray 2 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11"x17"/  
8.5"x14"/ 8.5"x11"/8.5"x11"R or 5.5"x8.5"R.  
9 Right side door of Drawer base opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.  
10 Tray 3 (DB-210 universal tray) (option) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets of  
either 11"x17"/8.5"x14"/ 8.5"x11"/8.5"x11"R or 5.5"x8.5"R.  
10 Tray 3 (DB-410 fixed tray) (option) is initially fixed at 8.5"x11". It can be reset by  
service 8.5"x11"R or A4.  
11 Tray 4 (DB-210 universal tray) (option) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets of  
either 11"x17"/8.5"x14"/ 8.5"x11"/8.5"x11"R or 5.5"x8.5"R.  
12 Storage accommodates copy paper or copy materials.  
13 Main power switch turns machine power ON/OFF to operate it as copier/  
scanner/printer/facsimile.  
14 Front door of main body opens to the internal copier to allow clearing of  
mishandled paper, replenishing of toner or cleaning the corona wire.  
15 Front door of Finisher opens to the internal finisher to allow clearing of  
mishandled paper, or inserting new staple cartridge.  
16 FS-107 Finisher (option) sorts, staples and groups into finished sets.  
17 Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed.  
18 LCD Touch screen displays interactive operation screens.  
19 Control panel controls copier operations.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
Internal Machine Items  
7 Transfer/Separator wire  
cleaning lever  
2 Finisher conveyance unit  
3 Toner bottle cover  
1 Finisher knob  
8 Fixing unit guide 5  
9 Conveyance  
unit cover 6  
10 Lever 1  
11 Lever 2  
12 Cover 3  
13 Lever 7  
4 Writing unit glass  
6 Developing unit  
cleaning knob  
14 ADU  
5 Corona wire cleaning knob  
15 Lever 4  
1 Finisher knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper in the Finisher.  
2 Finisher conveyance unit can be opened to ease removal of mishandled paper in  
the Finisher.  
3 Toner bottle cover is to be opened when supplying toner.  
4 Writing unit glass cleaning knob is withdrawn to clean the writing unit glass.  
5 Corona wire cleaning knob is withdrawn to clean the corona wire.  
6 Developing unit prints images to the drum, and needs to be replaced periodically.  
7 Transfer/Separator wire cleaning lever forms the copy image.  
8 Fixing unit guide fuses the toner onto the copy paper, and is to be opened for  
removal of mishandled paper.  
9 Conveyance unit cover passes the paper through the drum unit, and is to be  
opened for removal of mishandled paper.  
10 Lever 1 can be opened for removal of mishandled paper.  
11 Lever 2 can be opened to release the pressure rollers for removal of mishandled  
paper.  
12 Cover 3 can be opened for removal of mishandled paper.  
13 Lever 7 can be opened for removal of mishandled paper.  
14 ADU is used for stackless duplex copying.  
15 Lever 4 can be opened for removal of mishandled paper in ADU.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
Standard/Optional Equipment  
2
Machine  
DF-314 Reversing Automatic  
Document Feeder  
Information  
FT-107 Finisher Tray  
Machine  
Configuration  
CV-109 Platen Cover  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Loading  
Paper  
MU-403/  
MU-404/  
MU-405  
Changing  
Paper Size  
Memory Unit  
FS-107 Finisher  
IT-101 Inner Tray  
Main body  
IP-011 Image  
Processor  
MU-403/  
MU-404  
Memory Unit  
FK-102 Fax Kit  
FL-102  
IP-422 Image  
Processor  
(7022/7130)  
DK-109 Desk Unit  
PS-343 PostScript 3  
MU-411  
Memory Unit  
DB-210 Drawer Base Unit  
DB-410 Drawer Base Unit  
IP-423 Image  
Processor  
(7135)  
MU-404/MU-405  
Memory Unit  
PS-345 PostScript 3  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
Basic Screen  
The Basic Screen displays when copying operation becomes available after warm-up.  
5 JOB LIST key  
4 RESERVE key  
6 Job No. icon  
7 COUNT/SET  
3 Message area  
2 Icon area  
indicator  
8 Memory indicator  
9 SCAN key  
1 SETTING key  
10 Paper size/type  
indication area  
14 MODE setting area  
13 DENSITY setting area  
11 SIZE setting area  
12 LENS setting area  
1 SETTING key is selected when the screen displays basic copying conditions.  
Touch this key to return to the current print job settings when making selections for  
a reserve job.  
When any trouble occurs during a reserve setting, “SETTING” changes to flashing  
“JAM” or “ADD PAPER” according to the problem. See p. 5-7 to p. 5-9.  
2 Icon area displays the following icons.  
: ADD TONER icon is displayed when toner supply becomes low.  
: PM CALL icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due.  
: FINISHER MODE icon is displayed when a  
specific finisher mode is selected. When Staple mode is selected, this icon indi-  
cates the number of staples and staple position.  
: ROTATION icon is displayed when the Rotation is automatically functioning.  
3 Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that time.  
4 RESERVE key is touched to select copy conditions for a subsequent job while the  
current scan/print job is in progress.  
5 JOB LIST key is touched to view the current job status, to change the printing  
order of reserve jobs, or to cancel printing a reserve job.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
6 Job No. icon  
is displayed when [START] is pressed to start a reserve job  
of that number.  
2
Machine  
Your service representative can set the Job No. icon to display the page count while  
scanning the originals, and also tha copy count when printing job starts, instead of  
the job number.  
Information  
Machine  
Configuration  
7 COUNT/SET indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of the set count while printing.  
Loading  
Paper  
8 Memory indicator indicates the remaining memory available for the next  
operation.  
Changing  
9 SCAN key is touched to start scanning originals when any copy condition which  
requires Store mode is selected, or Store mode is directly selected on the Applica-  
tion Selection Screen.  
Paper Size  
10 Paper size/type indication area displays the paper size loaded in each tray and  
paper type of the selected tray under the “SIZE” indication, if specified by the Key  
Operator.  
11 SIZE setting area is used to select the desired copy size or APS.  
12 LENS setting area is used to select the desired magnification ratio.  
13 DENSITY setting area is used to specify the desired exposure level.  
14 MODE setting area is used to select the copy mode (1a1, 1a2, 2a1, or 2a2).  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Configuration (continued)  
Control Panel Layout  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
8
9
10  
17 16 15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
1 LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status, help information,  
interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions.  
2 CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job.  
3 HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function, and access to the  
Key Operator Mode Screen.  
4 DATA blinks while receiving print data in printer mode, then lights after completing it.  
5 KEYPAD enters numeric values.  
6 SCANNER/PRINTER switches the machine operation mode to scanner and printer in  
turn.  
7 FAX switches the machine operation mode to facsimile.  
8 COPY switches the machine operation mode to copy.  
9 INTERRUPT stops copying/facsimile/printing/scanning in progress to allow copying  
from the platen glass.  
10 POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier is  
inactive.  
11 STOP/CLEAR stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory.  
12 START activates copying or scanning.  
13 [#] (CLEAR QTY.) allows resetting of print quantity.  
14 [✽] (COUNTER) displays the Counter List Screen or accesses programming modes  
for setting special functions.  
15 AUTO RESET restores copier to default settings or to Key Operator settings.  
16 OUTPUT displays screens for selecting an Exit tray for Sort/ Staple/ Group mode in  
the machine with Finisher, selecting an Exit tray for Rotation sort/ Rotation group/  
Group mode in the machine with Inner tray, or selecting Rotation sort/ Rotation group/  
Group mode in the machine without Finisher.  
17 APPLICATION displays a menu screen for selecting special application functions, or  
displays screens for selecting Job Store/ Job Recall functions.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch  
To Turn On the Power  
2
Machine  
Information  
1. Turn ON the main power switch.  
The main power switch is located on the rear left side of the main body.  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Loading  
Paper  
Changing  
Paper Size  
Reminder!  
When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 3 seconds or  
longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function  
normally.  
2. Turn ON the power switch.  
The power switch is located on the far left side of the control panel.  
Warm-up takes approximately 30 seconds..  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)  
3. The Basic Screen will be displayed.  
The message on the Basic Screen will inform you that copying job is now available.  
DETAILS  
• When the initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the modified  
conditions will be displayed on the Basic Screen.  
• When “Enter E.C.M. password” is displayed, enter your password to  
use the machine.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)  
To Turn Off the Power  
2
Machine  
1. Turn OFF the power switch.  
Information  
The power switch is located on the far left side of the control panel.  
The touch screen and all the LEDs on the control panel will go out.  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Loading  
Paper  
Changing  
Paper Size  
2. Turn OFF the main power switch.  
The main power switch is located on the rear left side of the main body.  
DETAILS  
• When using the machine as facsimile or printer, do not turn off the main  
power switch.  
• When the machine is using the Weekly Timer function, turning off the  
main power switch will deactivate the function.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)  
Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power)  
This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period (initially 1 minute)  
of copier inactivity. The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit, the [START] LED will  
turn orange to show copier inactivity, and all other LEDs except those of the operation  
mode keys and the LCD screen will be turned off.  
HINT  
The Auto Low Power function can be set to 1 minute/ 5 minutes/ 10  
minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/  
240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For the Key Operator setting, see  
p. 11-41.  
If the machine has no options, the power will be turned off after 1 minute of copier  
inactivity, as the Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time.  
To start a copying job, press any key on the control panel or touch the LCD screen.  
The Auto Low Power will be released and the LCD screen recovers brightness.  
DETAILS  
• If the Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will  
be turned off without the LCD screen becoming dark.  
• The LCD screen will not become dark during a duplex copying job or  
when the Jam Position Screen is displayed.  
Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off)  
This function automatically shuts off the power after a specified period (initially 1  
minute for a machine with no options / 15 minutes for the machine with options) of  
copier inactivity.  
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit. All other LEDs and the LCD screen will be  
turned off.  
To start a copying job, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].  
Copying will become available.  
DATA  
HINTS  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
COPY  
HELP  
• The Auto shut-off can be set for 1 minute/ 5  
minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/  
90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the  
Key Operator mode. For the Key Operator  
setting, see p. 11-41.  
• When “Timer interrupt mode / Enter  
password” is displayed after pressing  
[POWER SAVER ON/OFF], see p. 7-2 and  
follow the procedure to continue.  
POWVER  
O
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRUPT  
CHECK  
5
8
0
PPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STOP/CLEAR  
START  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)  
Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually  
2
Machine  
Follow the procedure below to shut off or reduce the power manually.  
Information  
1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].  
Machine  
Configuration  
DATA  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
COPY  
HELP  
POWVER  
O
Loading  
Paper  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRUPT  
CHECK  
5
8
0
Changing  
Paper Size  
PPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STOP/CLEAR  
START  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
2. The Power save mode will be activated.  
The machine is initially set to automatically activate the Low Power mode.  
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit, the [START] LED will turn orange to  
show copier inactivity. All other LEDs except those of the operation mode keys and  
the LCD screen will be turned off.  
DETAILS  
The Key operator can set the machine to activate the Shut-Off mode when  
[POWER SAVER ON/OFF] is pressed. See p. 11-42 to p. 11-46.  
To release the mode, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].  
The machine will be available for copying operation.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
COPY  
HELP  
POWVER  
O
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRUPT  
CHECK  
5
8
0
PPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STOP/CLEAR  
START  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning On the Power Switch (continued)  
Entering an ECM Password (ECM)  
The Electronic Copy Monitor (ECM) allows the Key Operator to monitor all copying  
activities by controlling ECM password accounts. Copy quantity limits for specific  
accounts can be set.  
The ECM is not factory-set. An ECM password is required only when the ECM is  
activated, a User Password is assigned, and “Enter E.C.M. password” is displayed on  
the touch screen.  
Copying will be available by following procedure:  
HINT  
For details of the ECM setting, see p. 11-18 to p. 11-26.  
1. Enter ECM password.  
Enter your 8-digit ECM password, using the keypad.  
HINT  
For setting an ECM password, see p. 11-20 to p. 11-21.  
DETAILS  
If an invalid ECM password is entered, continue by entering the correct  
password.  
2. Press [START].  
Your current copy count and copy limit will be displayed for 3 sec.  
Current count / limit  
018888/025000  
3. Start a copying job.  
When the message changes to “Ready to copy,” copying job is available on the  
machine.  
DETAILS  
When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the message “Copy limit  
reached” will be displayed. In that case, contact the Key Operator to reset  
your copy limit.  
4. Press [✽] while pressing [#].  
The initial state will be restored, with the message “Enter E.C.M. password”  
displayed on the screen.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
A paper indicator is shown on each tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper  
level of the tray. (Four levels are provided:  
)
2
Machine  
Information  
When paper in a tray becomes empty, the indicator “ ” appears on the tray key.  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Loading  
Paper  
Changing  
Paper Size  
Follow the procedure below to insert paper in the empty tray.  
DETAILS  
When the Multi-sheet bypass tray is empty, “  
” will be displayed on the  
bypass tray key instead of the copy size indication.  
HINT  
The Key Operator can set the machine to indicate the paper type for each  
tray selected on the screen. For details, see p. 11-28.  
Loading Paper in Main Body Trays and DB-210 Trays  
Main body trays: Tray 1 and 2  
DB-210 trays: Tray 3 and 4  
1. Withdraw the main body tray or DB-210 tray.  
HINT  
See p. 2-2 to check positions of each tray.  
Reminder!  
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper (continued)  
2. Stack paper with curl side up.  
Load paper, aligning it to the right side of the tray.  
Rear guide plate  
Hook  
Size indication dial  
Reminder!  
• Do not load paper above the red line on the side guide plates.  
• Be sure that the rear guide plate is correctly positioned according to the  
paper size loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.  
3. While pressing the release knob, move the side guide plate against  
the paper.  
Release the release knob to lock the slide guide plate.  
Reminder!  
Do not change the paper size indication of the size indication dial at the  
front of the tray.  
Copying using a tray with a different size indicated may cause a paper  
misfeed.  
4. Push in the tray until it locks into place.  
The indicator on the tray key will change from “ ” to “ ”.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper (continued)  
Loading Paper in DB-410 Tray  
2
Machine  
DB-410 tray: Tray 3  
Information  
1. Withdraw the DB-410 tray.  
HINT  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
See p. 2-2 to check positions of each tray.  
Loading  
Paper  
Reminder!  
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.  
Changing  
Paper Size  
2. Stack paper with curl side up.  
Load paper, aligning it to the right side of the tray.  
The tray bottom will lower due to the stacker paper weight.  
Size indication dial  
Reminder!  
• Do not load paper above the hooks on the side guide plates.  
• Be sure that the rear guide plate is correctly positioned according to the  
paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.  
3. Push in the tray until it locks into place.  
The indicator on the tray 3 key will change from “ ” to “ ”.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper (continued)  
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray  
1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the  
copier.  
When loading large paper, withdraw the right edge of the Multi-sheet bypass tray to  
extend it.  
2. Load copy paper, and adjust the paper guides to the paper size.  
The loaded paper size will be indicated on the bypass tray key of the Basic Screen.  
Reminder!  
Load transparency film one sheet at a time. A maximum of 50 20 lb. sheets  
can be loaded at one time.  
3. When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Paper Size of Main Body Trays and DB-210 Trays  
The main body trays and DB-210 trays are user-adjustable. Change the paper size of  
the tray according to the procedure below.  
2
Machine  
Information  
1. Withdraw the tray for which the paper size will be changed.  
Machine  
Configuration  
Turn On/Off  
the Power  
Reminder!  
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.  
Loading  
Paper  
2. Remove the rear guide plate, then insert it into the position  
Changing  
Paper Size  
designated for your desired paper size.  
Remove the rear guide plate while pressing both edges of it.  
The rear guide plate positions are marked on the tray base plate.  
Reminder!  
Be sure to insert the rear guide plate into the position of the paper size to  
be set; otherwise machine trouble may occur.  
3. Set the size indication dial at the correct paper size.  
Reminder!  
Be sure that the correct paper size is indicated; otherwise a paper misfeed  
may occur.  
4. Push in the tray until it locks into place.  
The tray key on the Basic Screen will indicate the paper size currently specified.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Copying Operations  
How to Make a Basic Copy  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
3
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Positioning Originals................................................................................3-2  
Setting Print Quantity ..........................................................................3-7  
Selecting Copy Size.................................................................................3-8  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode).......................................3-12  
Selecting Density Level .........................................................................3-16  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) ........................................3-18  
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2a1).........3-22  
Copying Using Memory.....................................................................3-24  
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher............................................3-31  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher.............................................3-34  
Output Mode for Machine with Inner Tray..............................................3-38  
Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying..............................3-41  
Interrupt Copying ...................................................................................3-44  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Originals  
Positioning Originals in RADF  
The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 50 originals directly to the  
platen area, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled,  
smooth, flat originals.  
Positioning originals in Normal mode  
1. Arrange originals in order.  
Reminder!  
• Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is fully  
close. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise  
selected copy conditions may be automatically altered.  
• Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 9-6 for details.  
2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.  
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.  
Up to 50 originals can be set at a time.  
Reminder!  
• Do not set more than 50 originals or set originals over the red line indi-  
cated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur.  
• If the number of originals exceeds 50, divide them into blocks not  
exceeding 50 sheets, then load them from the block with the first page.  
See p. 3-24 to p. 3-26.  
3. Adjust paper guides.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Originals (continued)  
Positioning originals in Mixed original mode  
Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder.  
HINT  
To use the Mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 8-28 to p. 8-30.  
1. Arrange originals in order.  
3
Copying  
Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below.  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
To the  
depth  
To the left  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Setting  
direction  
Reminder!  
• Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is fully  
close. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the  
selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.  
Using  
Memory  
• Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 9-6 for details.  
HINT  
Output without  
Finisher  
See p. 9-7 for allowable combinations of mixed originals.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
2. Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of  
the document feeder tray.  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.  
Up to 50 originals can be set at a time.  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
3. Adjust paper guides.  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Originals (continued)  
Positioning originals in Folded original mode  
Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size detection  
sensor of the RADF.  
HINT  
To use the Folded original mode, see procedure on p. 8-31 to p. 8-33.  
1. Arrange originals in order.  
2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.  
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.  
Up to 50 originals can be set at a time.  
Reminder!  
• Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is fully  
close. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the  
selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.  
• Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 9-6 for details.  
3. Adjust paper guides.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Originals (continued)  
Positioning Original on Platen Glass  
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder,  
e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in  
otherwise poor condition.  
1. Raise the document feeder (or platen cover).  
3
Copying  
Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning the edge with the left  
measuring guide.  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
2. Gently close the document feeder (or platen cover) to prevent the  
original from shifting on the glass.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
Reminder!  
When selecting Book Copy, Non-Image Area Erase, AUTO mode in  
Repeat, or AUTO Layout, DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder. For  
details on each function, see Section 8.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Originals (continued)  
3. When repeating the original placement, press the release lever under  
the document feeder.  
4. Use only the lower cover to ease the original placement.  
CAUTION  
Do not place heavy originals and do not press strongly when a  
thick original is placed on the platen glass and is under  
pressure of the RADF; otherwise, the glass may be broken and  
you may be injured.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Print Quantity  
This section describes how to set or change print quantity.  
To Set Print Quantity  
The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by the print  
quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.  
3
Copying  
1. Enter the desired print quantity on the control panel keypad.  
Operations  
DATA  
Positioning  
Originals  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
5
0
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.  
To Change Print Quantity  
Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity after it has been entered.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
1. Press [# (CLEAR QTY.)].  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
Interrupt  
Mode  
CLETY.  
AUTO RESET  
The quantity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.  
2. Enter the correct quantity.  
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Copy Size  
To select an appropriate copy size for getting your desired copy result, use APS  
(Automatic Paper Selection), or select copy size manually on the touch screen, as  
required.  
To Select Copy Size Automatically (APS)  
APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and automatically  
selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according  
to the magnification ratio selected.  
HINTS  
• See the table on the following page for the relation of original size,  
magnification ratio and copy paper size.  
• The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 11-7  
to p. 11-14.  
1. Touch to highlight APS at lower right corner of the Basic Screen.  
APS is already highlighted when the initial settings are restored.  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
4. Position original(s).  
HINTS  
• See p. 9-6 to p. 9-8 for paper sizes detectable from the RADF or on the  
platen glass.  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
• Key Operator can deactivate APS when original is set in the RADF or on  
the platen glass. See p. 11-42 to p. 11-46.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Copy Size (continued)  
5. Press [START].  
DETAILS  
• If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be  
performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate  
paper.  
• Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this  
case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 7-4.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and  
copy paper size.  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Original size  
Copy size  
Copy size  
0.25 - 0.50  
11x17 8.5x14 8.5x11 8.5x11R 5.5x8.5  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
0.25 - 0.50 5.5x8.5R  
5.5x8.5R  
5.5x8.5R  
5.5x8.5R  
0.51 - 0.61  
8.5x11R  
0.51 - 0.61  
0.62 - 0.65  
0.66 - 0.77  
0.78 - 0.79  
0.80 - 1.00  
1.01 - 1.29  
1.30 - 1.55  
1.56 - 4.00  
(8.5x11)  
0.62 - 0.65  
5.5x8.5R  
8.5x11R  
(8.5x11)  
8.5x14  
0.66 - 0.77  
0.78 - 0.79  
0.80 - 1.00  
1.01 - 1.29  
1.30 - 1.55  
1.56 - 4.00  
8.5x11  
(8.5x11R)  
8.5x11R  
(8.5x11)  
8.5x14  
11x17  
8.5x11  
(8.5x11R)  
Using  
Memory  
11x17  
11x17 11x17  
8.5x14  
11x17  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
(
): Rotation functions  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Copy Size (continued)  
To Specify Desired Copy Size (AMS)  
When a copy size is specified on the touch screen, an appropriate reduction or  
enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original size detected  
from the RADF or the platen glass.  
HINTS  
• See the table on the following page for the relation of original size, copy  
paper size, and magnification ratio.  
• Wide paper size can be specified when AMS is in use.  
In this case, the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size  
will be selected automatically.  
• To copy in 1.00 (100%) magnification mode and specifying a copy size,  
see p. 3-12.  
1. Touch a tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired paper  
size.  
The selected tray key will be highlighted, and under LENS MODE, -A- will also be  
highlighted.  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
4. Position original(s).  
HINTS  
• See p. 9-6 to p. 9-8 for original sizes detectable from the RADF or on  
the platen glass.  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
5. Press [START].  
The scanned image will be printed on the specified copy size in the selection  
magnification ratio.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Copy Size (continued)  
DETAILS  
Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this  
case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 7-4.  
See the table below for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and  
selection magnification ratio.  
3
Copying  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
AMS TABLE  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
11"x17" 8.5"x14" 8.5"x11"R 8.5"x11" 5.5"x8.5"  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
11"x17"  
8.5"x14"  
1.00  
0.77  
1.21  
1.00  
1.29  
1.00  
1.00  
0.77  
2.00  
1.54  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
0.64  
0.50  
0.50  
0.78  
0.60  
0.60  
1.00  
0.77  
0.64  
1.29  
1.00  
1.00  
0.77  
1.00  
0.50  
8.5"x11"R  
8.5"x11"  
5.5"x8.5"  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode)  
When the copier is turned ON, the magnification ratio is set to 1.00 (100%) automatically  
on the Basic Screen.  
Follow each procedure described in this section to select the desired magnification  
ratio.  
To Copy in 1.00 Magnification Mode  
Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.  
1. Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].  
The initial settings are restored. Check that APS indicates that the 1.00 magnification  
is selected.  
HINT  
The initial settings may be altered by the Key Operator. See p. 11-7 to p.  
11-14.  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
DETAILS  
Specifying copy size will release 1.00 magnification and set -A- (AMS)  
automatically. In this case, touch 1.00 to highlight it again.  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
4. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
5. Press [START].  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)  
To Copy in Fixed Magnification Mode (RE)  
Use the 6 preset ratios (0.50, 0.65, 0.77, 1.29, 1.55, 2.00) and 3 user preset ratios to  
increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts.  
>>> Specification for Fixed Magnification Mode <<<  
Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image  
Shift  
3
Copying  
Operations  
1. Touch RE on the Basic Screen.  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
The popup menu for selecting the desired preset/user preset ratio will be displayed.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
Using  
Memory  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Output without  
Finisher  
2. Select the desired magnification.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
DETAILS  
Touching any key on the popup menu will momentarily highlight that key,  
then the popup menu will disappear automatically.  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.  
Three user preset ratios are adjustable by the Key Operator. See p. 11-17.  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
5. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
6. Press [START].  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)  
To Copy in Zoom Mode  
Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 1% increments.  
>>> Specification for Zoom Mode <<<  
Zoom range: 25% to 400%  
Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image  
Shift  
1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.  
The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch the Vertical/Horizontal zoom key on the popup menu, if it is  
not highlighted, then set the desired zoom ratio.  
DETAILS  
Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired magnification ratio  
in 3 digits, or use arrows (c / d) to scroll to the desired ratio.  
If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct 3-digit ratio.  
3. Touch OK.  
The popup menu disappears automatically and the specified zoom ratio will be  
displayed on the Basic Screen.  
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)  
6. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
7. Press [START].  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Density Level  
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES) operates with the default settings. It detects the  
density of the original image and automatically selects the appropriate exposure for  
the copy.  
A B C D  
E F G H  
IJKLM  
N O P Q  
RSTUV  
W X Y Z  
Light original  
A B C D  
E F G H  
IJKLM  
N O P Q  
RSTUV  
W X Y Z  
Normal  
A B C D  
E F G H  
IJKLM  
N O P Q  
RSTUV  
W X Y Z  
Dark original  
To Select Copy Density  
Select manual copy density to adjust exposure (density) when originals are too light or  
too dark. Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels on the Basic Screen.  
1. Touch DARKER to darken, or touch LIGHTER to lighten the copy  
image.  
Move the arrow (a) to the left side of the desired exposure level indicator.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
DETAILS  
• Touch NORMAL to select the middle density level.  
• To select the user-set density (USER1 or USER2), see p. 11-15.  
• When resuming AES, touch AES.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Density Level (continued)  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
4. Position original(s).  
3
Copying  
Operations  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
5. Press [START].  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1  
a
2, 2 2)  
a
The Basic Screen is initially set to 1a1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from  
single-sided originals.  
Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals scanned  
from the document feeder or from the platen glass.  
Using RADF  
Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or double-sided).  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
2-2 Copying  
1-2 Copying  
Duplex copy  
Double-sided original  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Single-sided original  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Duplex copy  
1. Touch 1a2 or 2a2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
DETAILS  
Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected  
copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible  
with the selected copy mode.  
3
Copying  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
4. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
5. Press [START].  
The machine scans originals, then prints duplex copies when they are ready for  
output.  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the scanning or printing job.  
Using  
Memory  
CAUTION  
Output without  
Finisher  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)  
Using Platen Glass  
Use the platen glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.  
>>>Specification for Double-Sided Copying Using Platen Glass<<<  
❒ Use the Platen store mode.  
❒ See p. 9-6 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, Transparency Interleave, Image Insert,  
Special Original (Non-Standard Size)  
1. Open the document feeder.  
The RADF indication on the Basic Screen will disappear and the 2a1 and 2a2 keys  
will be dimmed to show inactivity.  
2. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.  
Be sure to start from the first page.  
HINTS  
• See p. 9-6 for original sizes detectable on the platen glass.  
• See p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.  
3. Touch 1a2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.  
Reminder!  
DO NOT press [AUTO RESET] at this point, otherwise the selected mode  
will be released and the copier cannot scan the original placed on the  
glass.  
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
DETAILS  
Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected  
copy mode. In this case, arrange settings so that they are compatible with  
the selected copy mode.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Double-Sided Copies (1a2, 2a2) (continued)  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
6. Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen.  
The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into memory.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
7. Replace the original on the platen glass with the back side down,  
then touch SCAN.  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
DETAILS  
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.  
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to  
check the remaining memory.  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].  
8. Press [START] to print.  
All the data in memory will be output.  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the printing job.  
CAUTION  
Using  
Memory  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2 1)  
a
Use RADF and select 2a1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided  
originals.  
Front Back  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Front Back  
Simplex copy  
2-1 Copying  
Double-sided oriFginarl ont  
1. Touch 2a1 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
DETAILS  
Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected  
copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible  
with the selected copy mode.  
3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2  
a1) (continued)  
4. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
5. Press [START].  
3
Copying  
The machine starts to scan originals, then prints simplex copies when they are ready  
for output.  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the scanning or printing job.  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
CAUTION  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory  
This section describes various copying features available on this machine using its  
built-in memory.  
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode)  
Store mode allows you to scan all the originals first, then to start a continuous printing  
job.  
Use RADF store mode to scan a large amount of originals.  
Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder  
due to thickness, size or condition.  
DETAILS  
RADF tray capacity is 50; however, more than 50 originals can be scanned  
into memory using RADF store mode.  
>>>Specification for Store Mode<<<  
❒ Incompatible with RADF store mode: Image Insert, Book Copy  
❒ Incompatible with Platen store mode: None  
1. Make copying selections, as desired.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
3. Touch Store Mode to highlight it.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
You may find the key already highlighted due to the copying selections made.  
4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
6. Position original(s).  
Using platen glass:  
Using  
Memory  
Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page.  
Output without  
Finisher  
Reminder!  
When Book Copy, Non-Image Area Erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat,  
or AUTO Layout is selected, keep the RADF open throughout the scanning  
procedure.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Using RADF:  
Output Modes  
Position originals FACE UP.  
If the number of originals exceeds 50, divide them into blocks not exceeding 50  
sheets and load them from the block with the first page.  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
7. Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.  
DETAILS  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all originals are scanned.  
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to  
check the remaining memory.  
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].  
HINT  
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you  
contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your  
machine.  
8. Press [START] to print.  
All the data in memory will be output.  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the printing job.  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve)  
The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in progress.  
When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately.  
>>>Specifications for Reserve<<<  
❒ Job settings: Max. 5 (current job plus 4 reserve jobs)  
❒ When the current job is in Store mode, Image Insert, or Book Copy, the reserve job  
setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof copy  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
1. Press [START] to start scanning/printing for the current job.  
RESERVE will become active to show that the reserve job setting is now available  
.
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Using  
Memory  
2. Touch RESERVE to highlight it.  
The Reserve Job Setting Screen will be displayed.  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
On the Reserve Job Setting Screen, all keys on the LCD and control panel will  
function for the reserve job.  
3. Select copy conditions for the reserve job, as desired.  
HINT  
When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the SETTING key on  
the Basic Screen will change to JAM or ADD PAPER key. See p. 5-7 to p.  
5-9.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
4. Position original(s) after completing the scan for the current job.  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
5. Press [START] to start scanning for the reserve job.  
DETAILS  
When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will  
be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job.  
When completed, the Basic Screen for the current printing job will be restored.  
Repeat steps 2 to 5 to reserve more than one job.  
6. Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing the  
current job.  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job List Screen)  
The Job List Screen allows you to perform the following functions.  
• Confirm machine status  
• Delete reserve job  
• Change order of reserve job  
1. Touch JOB LIST on the Basic Screen.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
The Job List Screen will be displayed.  
Check the current status of the machine.  
2. Perform the desired setting on the screen.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
HINT  
See the next page for details of the screen.  
To change the order of a reserve job:  
Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job, then touch  
ADVANCE.  
The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job  
preceding it is already in progress.  
To clear reserve job:  
Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job, then touch  
DELETE. The Job Clear Confirmation Screen will be displayed.  
Touch YES to clear the highlighted reserve job, or NO to cancel.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Using Memory (continued)  
3. Touch OK on the Job List Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Contents of Job List Screen  
NO. :  
Displays the No. (001-999) for each job assigned to the machine.  
MODE:  
Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Three modes are listed below.  
COPIER  
FAX  
PRINTER  
SCANNER  
STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job.  
ERROR  
PRINTING  
NO PAPER  
STOP  
: Error in each mode  
: Printing in each mode  
: No paper in each mode  
: Stop in each mode  
JAM  
: Jam in each mode  
: Scanning original(s) in copy mode  
: Waiting to be output  
SCANNING  
WAITING  
TOTAL PAGE(s): Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 9999)  
PAGE(s) LEFT: Displays the remaining copy count of the job.  
0 to 9999  
Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity  
MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job.  
Shorter than 1 minute: <1  
2 ~ 999  
DETAILS  
The time displayed is an approximation; output may take slightly longer.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher  
This section describes the output modes for the copier without a Finisher.  
The Non-sort mode is initially selected.  
1 Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity  
setting, then outputs sorted sets normally.  
2
Rotation sort mode rotates every other set by 90° upon exit, provided the same paper  
size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the  
other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., 8.5”x11” and 8.5”x11”R.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
3 Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity  
setting, then outputs grouped sets normally.  
Positioning  
Originals  
4
Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90° upon exit, provided the  
same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation  
and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., 8.5”x11” and  
8.5”x11”R.  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Originals  
3
2
Example:  
3-set copies  
1
Rotation sort  
Group  
Rotation group  
Non-sort (default)  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
>>>Specification for Output Modes without Finisher<<<  
❒
Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet,  
Transparency, Image Insert, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
(Numbering)  
❒ Incompatible with Rotation sort mode: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet,  
Transparency, Special Original (Mixed Original), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image  
Area Erase  
❒ Incompatible with Rotation group mode: Using platen glass (unless Chapter with  
Platen store mode, Upside down, Image Shift, or Stamp (excluding Numbering) is  
used), Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet, Transparency, Image Insert,  
Special Original (Mixed Original), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase,  
Stamp (Numbering)  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)  
1. When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same  
paper size into two trays in different orientation.  
HINT  
Non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial  
output mode. See p. 11-12.  
2. Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.  
3. Select the desired output mode.  
Touch the desired output mode key to highlight it.  
To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys.  
4. Touch OK.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
5. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINTS  
• See p. 9-3 to be sure that the exit tray capacity is not exceeded.  
• See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)  
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
8. Press [START].  
3
Copying  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the scanning or printing job.  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
CAUTION  
When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print  
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;  
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher  
Finisher FS-107 is initially equipped with two exit trays. If desired, up to two optional  
exit trays can be installed.  
Each exit tray provides output modes as described below.  
1 Non-sort mode means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected.  
Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets.  
2 Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set; each sorted set will be offset  
by 30mm upon exit.  
3 Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Up to 50 sheets (or a stack up to  
5mm thick) can be stapled.  
4 Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by  
30mm upon exit.  
4
3
2
1
Example:  
Make 3 copied sets  
from 4 original sheets  
4
Group  
Non-sort  
Sort  
Staple-sort  
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
4
4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
3
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
2 staples  
3
3
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
2
2
4
3
2
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
1 oblique  
staple  
Offset by 30mm  
Offset by 30mm  
The copier is initially set to output to tray 1 in Sort mode.  
Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)  
>>>Specification for Output Modes with Finisher<<<  
❒ Incompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Book Copy,  
or Platen store mode is used), Transparency, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image  
Area Erase  
❒ Incompatible with Staple mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Book  
Copy, or Platen store mode is used), Booklet, Transparency, Special Original  
(Mixed Original with APS), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase  
3
Copying  
Reminder!  
Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple mode  
may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets.  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
❒
Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet,  
Transparency, Image Insert, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
(Numbering)  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
1. Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].  
HINT  
The Sort mode using tray 1 is initially selected.  
Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 11-12.  
2. Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
Using  
Memory  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
Output without  
Finisher  
APPLICATION  
OT  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
IT-101  
AUTO RESET  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3. Select the desired output mode.  
Touch to highlight the desired output mode key in the OUTPUT mode area.  
To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)  
When selecting Staple mode, select the staple position as follows.  
When selecting any other mode, proceed to step 6.  
4. Touch STAPLE SET.  
DETAILS  
STAPLE SET on this screen will change to ADD STAPLE when replacement  
of the staple cartridge is required. See p. 10-5.  
5. Select the desired staple position.  
Touch to highlight the desired staple position key on the Staple Position Selection  
popup menu.  
Touch OK to restore the Output Mode popup menu.  
6. Touch OK.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
DETAILS  
The finisher mode icon (Non-sort: none, Sort:  
, Group:  
, Staple:  
)
or staple position icon appears/disappears in the message area of the  
screen to indicate the selected output mode.  
7. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued)  
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 9-3~p. 9-4 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded.  
9. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
10.Press [START].  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the scanning or printing job.  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
CAUTION  
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the  
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;  
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Inner Tray IT-101  
This section describes the following four output modes for a copier with the Inner Tray.  
Non-sort mode is initially selected.  
The Inner Tray IT-101 is equipped with two exit trays.  
1 Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity  
setting, then outputs sorted sets normally.  
2
Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90° upon exit, provided the same  
paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and  
the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., 8.5”x11” and 8.5”x11”R.  
3 Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity  
setting, then outputs grouped sets normally.  
4
Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90° upon exit, provided the  
same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation  
and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., 8.5”x11” and  
8.5”x11”R.  
Originals  
3
2
Example:  
3-set copies  
1
Rotation sort  
Group  
Rotation group  
Non-sort (default)  
>>>Specification for Output Modes with Inner Tray<<<  
❒
Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet,  
Transparency, Image Insert, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
(Numbering)  
❒ Incompatible with Rotation sort mode: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet,  
Transparency, Special Original (Mixed Original), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image  
Area Erase  
❒ Incompatible with Rotation group mode: Using platen glass (unless Chapter with  
Platen store mode, Upside down, Image Shift, or Stamp (excluding Numbering) is  
used), Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet, Transparency, Image Insert,  
Special Original (Mixed Original), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase,  
Stamp (Numbering)  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Inner Tray IT-101 (continued)  
1. When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same  
paper size into two trays with different orientation.  
HINT  
Non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial  
output mode. See p. 11-12.  
2. Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
Positioning  
Originals  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
Setting Print  
Quantity  
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OT  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.  
3. Select the desired output mode.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Touch the desired output mode key to highlight it.  
To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys.  
Interrupt  
Mode  
4. Touch OK.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
5. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINTS  
• See p. 9-3 to be sure that the exit tray capacity is not exceeded.  
• See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Mode for Machine with Inner Tray IT-101 (continued)  
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
8. Press [START].  
Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the scanning or printing job.  
CAUTION  
When the inner tray capacity is exceeded due to the print  
quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit;  
otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying  
Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before starting print operation.  
In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making  
multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the  
following copying selections.  
• Copying conditions using Store mode • Booklet  
• Sheet/Cover insertion  
• Chapter  
• Combination  
• Image insert  
• Book Copy  
3
Copying  
Operations  
Positioning  
Originals  
>>>Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy<<<  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
❒ Proof copy is available when using RADF or Platen store mode for multiple originals.  
❒ Proof copy cannot be used for testing the Userset density.  
❒ Proof copy is not compatible with Group or Rotation group output mode and  
Reserve mode.  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Position original(s).  
Using  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
3. Press [CHECK] on the control panel.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
HELP  
CK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
Interrupt  
Mode  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Check Screen will be displayed.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying (continued)  
Verify the settings made for the current job.  
• If settings are OK, proceed to step 8.  
• If a sample copy is needed, proceed to the next step.  
4. If any setting change is required before proofcopying, touch EXIT to  
return to the Basic Screen, then change settings, as required.  
5. Touch PROOF COPY on the Check Screen.  
A sample copy will be output.  
DETAILS  
• Press [STOP/CLEAR] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the  
scanned image data will not be deleted from memory.  
• You can change selections with an asterisk (*) displayed on the left side  
after proof copying.  
If the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to step 7.  
If any setting change is required, proceed to the next step.  
DETAILS  
If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [STOP/CLEAR] to  
delete all the data in memory, then press [AUTO RESET] to restart the job  
setting.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying (continued)  
6. Touch EXIT (or press [CHECK]) to return to the Basic Screen.  
Change the settings, as required.  
7. Change the print quantity, as required.  
DETAILS  
Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on  
the Basic Screen reaches zero.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen.  
Positioning  
Originals  
8. Press [START].  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, except the sample  
sets.  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
Interrupt  
Mode  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interrupt Copying  
Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When  
interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and  
the Basic Screen displays.  
Interrupt copying is available when the copier is performing the following operations:  
• Continuously printing the image stored in memory  
• Scanning the originals into memory  
• Scanning the originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode  
The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions:  
• The Basic Screen is not displayed.  
• The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs.  
1. Press [INTERRUPT] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
COPY  
HELP  
CHECK  
POWER SAVER  
ON / OFF  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTEPT  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STOP/CLEAR  
START  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns on and the SETTING indicator on the Basic Screen  
changes to INTERRUPT.  
HINT  
The timing to enter the Interrupt mode varies according to the job in  
progress on the machine when [INTERRUPT] is pressed.  
See the following page.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interrupt Copying (continued)  
DETAILS  
In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes  
scanning the reserve job originals clears the settings selected for the  
reserve job.  
For details of Reserve mode, see p. 3-27 to p. 3-28.  
2. Set copy conditions, as desired.  
3
Copying  
Operations  
The initial settings in Interrupt mode are as follows.  
Copy Mode  
RADF  
: 1a1  
: ON  
Positioning  
Originals  
AES  
Lens Mode  
APS  
Print Quantity : 1  
Finisher : Exit Tray 1 in Sort mode  
: ON  
: 1.00 (100%)  
: ON  
Setting Print  
Quantity  
Copy Size  
Lens Mode  
Density  
1-1, 2-2  
2-1  
DETAILS  
Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder,  
if present.  
3. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
Using  
Memory  
Output without  
Finisher  
4. Press [START] to start the interrupt copying.  
FS-107  
Output Modes  
DETAILS  
When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt copying, the information  
displayed reflects the initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display  
Interrupt copy job information.  
IT-101  
Output Modes  
Check Mode  
& Proof Copy  
5. When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again.  
Interrupt  
Mode  
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns out and the INTERRUPT indicator on the Basic Screen  
returns to the SETTING indicator.  
The settings of the initial job will be restored on the Basic Screen.  
6. Press [START] to resume copying.  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interrupt Copying (continued)  
DETAILS  
For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after certain phases  
of the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by the [INTER-  
RUPT] LED conditions described below.  
• Collectively printing image stored in memory  
The LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed.  
Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in  
Interrupt mode.  
• Scanning originals into memory  
The LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the  
document feeder.  
Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in  
Interrupt mode.  
• Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode  
The LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job, scans  
all originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one set of the  
Reserved job.  
The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt  
mode.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Job Memory & Help Mode  
How to Use Helpful Functions  
4
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)....................................4-2  
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)...................4-6  
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) ..............................4-8  
Job Memory  
Help Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)  
Use Job Store to store up to 15 frequently used copy job settings, which can be  
recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names.  
>>>Specifications for Job Memory<<<  
❒ All copying functions can be selected.  
❒ Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory.  
1. Make job selections from the Basic Screen and/or Application Selection  
Screen.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch JOB MEMORY.  
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)  
4. Touch ENTRY.  
4
Job Memory  
The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.  
&Help Mode  
5. Review the settings on the Job Store Check Screen.  
Job Memory  
Help Mode  
Check that the selections made in step 1 are correctly entered.  
DETAILS  
If any correction is required, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.  
Make new selections, then restart the Job Store operation from step 2.  
6. Touch OK.  
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.  
DETAILS  
To suspend the storing job after step 7, press [AUTO RESET].  
Job Memory mode will be cancelled, and the Basic Screen will return from  
any screen.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)  
7. Touch to highlight one of the keys numbered from 1~15 to store the  
job under that number.  
The screen displays 5 job number keys. The arrow keys at the right side can be used  
to scroll to the next/previous page.  
A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that number. A job without a lock  
icon ( ) displayed can be overwritten.  
The job with a lock icon ( ) is locked and cannot be selected.  
HINT  
To lock or unlock a job, and to delete a locked job, see p. 11-27.  
DETAILS  
If you wish to cancel the job number selection, touch CANCEL to restore  
the Basic Screen, which displays the settings made in step 1.  
If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO RESET].  
8. Touch OK.  
The Job Name Registration Screen will be displayed.  
9. Enter a job name.  
Enter a job name in up to 24 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad.  
If required, scroll with the upper and lower arrows to use lower case and symbol  
keys.  
To correct an entry, touch DEL. repeatedly to delete each character entered, then  
enter the correct job name.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)  
DETAILS  
If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch OK. The key displays 6  
asterisks (*) in place of a name.  
10.Touch OK.  
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.  
Check that the job name has been correctly entered.  
11.Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
Job Memory  
Help Mode  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)  
Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.  
2. Touch JOB MEMORY.  
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch to highlight a job number key to select a job you want to  
recall.  
The screen displays 5 job number keys. If required, scroll to the next page with the  
arrow keys to reach the desired job number key (6~15).  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) (continued)  
4. If desired, touch JOB CHECK.  
The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings.  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
5. Touch OK.  
Job Memory  
The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Basic Screen.  
To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.  
Help Mode  
6. Position original(s), then press [START] to print.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)  
The Help Screen provides you with the information about the current screen mode  
and about setting procedures. Help mode can be accessed from any screen except  
Job Memory and Key Operator Screens.  
Help mode provides two types of Help Screens according to the current screen mode:  
1 Help Screen accessed from Basic Screen  
2 Help Screen accessed from screens other than Basic Screen  
To Display the Help Screen from Basic Screen  
1. Return to the Basic Screen, then press [HELP].  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Help Screen will be displayed.  
2. Touch the desired key to display specific information.  
• Staple provides information on replacing staple cartridge.  
• RADF provides information on positioning originals in the document feeder.  
• Toner provides information on adding toner.  
• TRAY provides information on loading paper in each tray.  
• HELP MENU displays the Help Menu Screen which provides a list of all of the  
copier functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays  
information specific to that topic.  
• Assistance displays the extension number of the Key Operator.  
• Service call displays the phone/fax number of your service center.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)  
DETAILS  
• Touch  
Touch  
on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page.  
to return to the previous page.  
• Touch Key-Ope mode to enter the Key Operator mode. See p. 11-2.  
3. Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen.  
DETAILS: Help Menu Screen  
4
Job Memory  
&Help Mode  
Job Memory  
Help Mode  
Select one of the 5 help menu items on the Help Menu Screen to display  
subsequent Help Screens.  
Touch  
Touch  
on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page.  
to return to the previous page.  
Touch MENU on the subsequent Help Screen to return to the Help Menu  
Screen, then touch EXIT to restore the Basic Screen.  
• “1. Hard keys” displays information on control panel buttons.  
• “2. Screen keys” displays information on the keys provided on the LCD  
touch screen.  
• “3. RADF and Platen” displays information on unsuitable RADF originals  
and maintenance of the document feeder and platen glass.  
• “4. Applications” displays operational information on 16 application  
functions provided on the Application Selection Screen.  
• “5. Job memory” displays information on Job Memory.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)  
To Display Help Screen from Other Screens  
1. While in any screen other than the Basic Screen, press [HELP].  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Help Screen displays to provide the information about the current screen mode  
and setting procedures.  
2. Touch EXIT.  
The screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP] will be restored.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
How to Handle Machine Troubles  
5
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed .......................................5-2  
Preventive Maintenance......................................................................5-4  
Clearing Mishandled Paper .....................................................................5-5  
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key...................................................5-7  
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key..........................................5-9  
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)..........5-10  
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed...........................................5-12  
Troubleshooting Tips .........................................................................5-13  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
Call for  
Service  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
Memory  
Overflow  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed  
A “Call for Service” message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention  
of your service representative.  
The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of  
your service representative.  
CAUTION  
When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to  
contact your service representative immediately by following  
the procedure below.  
1. Make note of the Report code No. indicated in the second line of the  
message area.  
HINT  
If your machine uses the Remote Diagnostics option and is automatically  
monitored by your service representative, the Key Operator can call for  
service using the Key Operator setting. See p. 11-50.  
Reminder!  
After calling for service using the Key Operator setting, be sure to turn OFF  
the power switch and main power switch immediately, then unplug the  
machine as described here.  
2. Turn OFF the power switch and main power switch.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed (continued)  
3. Unplug the machine.  
4. Contact your service representative and report the condition and  
code No.  
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble  
If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may  
continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU  
that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier,  
consult your service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only  
temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.  
1. If the limited use of the copier is available, the following message is  
displayed in the message area instead of the Report code.  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
ex. Tray 2 failure  
Call for  
Service  
Press AUTO to select except this tray  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
2. Press [AUTO RESET].  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
Please switch ON/OFF  
E 18-2  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
Make note of the Report code No.  
Memory  
Overflow  
3. Turn OFF then ON the power switch.  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the machine (ex. Tray  
2).  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
CAUTION  
EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE  
ABOVE OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE  
REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR  
SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preventive Maintenance  
After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Preventive Maintenance  
(PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance.  
When preventive maintenance is due, a message and PM CALL icon (  
prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance.  
) will  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Mishandled Paper  
When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper  
codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). Copying operation cannot be  
continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.  
GUIDE key  
Touch to display the subsequent  
screens for the disposal action.  
Message area  
An action will be displayed.  
Paper jam position display  
Numbers flashing or lighting  
indicate the jammed positions.  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
Call for  
Service  
DETAILS  
The above screen displays all the jam numbers for the sake of explanation.  
Only the relevant numbers appear when a paper misfeed actually occurs.  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
1. Touch GUIDE on the screen.  
JAM Key  
The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
Memory  
Overflow  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
Reminder!  
Before performing the clearing procedure, see p. 1-2 for the caution label  
locations inside the machine.  
2. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.  
Touch  
on the screen, if provided, to go to the next page of a series of  
illustrations.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Mishandled Paper (continued)  
Reminder!  
When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside  
the machine.  
3. When completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.  
If any misfeed remaining, the screen displays the next disposal procedure in the  
message area and the location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to  
2 until all the locations are cleared.  
WARNING  
The drum unit generates high voltage.  
To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.  
CAUTION  
The area near the conveyance unit cover 6 generates high  
voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT  
TOUCH!  
CAUTION  
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as  
not to get injured.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key  
If a misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve  
job, SETTING folder key on the Basic Screen will change to flashing JAM.  
Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.  
1. Display the Jam Position Screen.  
5
Trouble-  
Touch JAM. The Jam Position Screen will be displayed.  
shooting  
Call for  
Service  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
Memory  
Overflow  
HINT  
If ADD PAPER is displayed instead of JAM, see p. 5-9.  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
2. Touch GUIDE.  
The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.  
HINT  
See p. 5-5 to p. 5-6 for details on clearing procedure.  
3. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.  
When all procedures are completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.  
DETAILS  
JAM has changed to SETTING, and the settings for the current printing job  
are displayed on the screen.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (continued)  
4. Press [START].  
The scan/print job will resume.  
5. Touch RESERVE to continue the reserve job setting.  
WARNING  
The drum unit generates high voltage.  
To avoid electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.  
CAUTION  
The area near the conveyance unit cover 6 generates high  
voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT  
TOUCH!  
CAUTION  
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as  
not to get injured.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key  
If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a  
reserve job, SETTING on the Basic Screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER.  
Follow the procedure below to continue the copying operation.  
1. Display the Basic Screen for the print job in progress.  
5
Touch ADD PAPER. The Basic Screen for the print job will be displayed.  
Trouble-  
shooting  
Call for  
Service  
2. Check the empty tray, then supply that tray with paper.  
HINT  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
See p. 2-15 to p. 2-18 for details on loading paper.  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
3. Press [START].  
The ADD PAPER will change to SETTING and the print job will resume.  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
4. Touch RESERVE to continue the reserve job setting.  
Memory  
Overflow  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)  
In certain modes, this printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient and  
smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is  
inadequate for the copy conditions selected.  
To handle the Memory overflow condition while performing a job, take the appropriate  
action described below. These actions enable you to continue the job or suspend the  
job.  
• Copying in Group mode without Store mode selected . . . . . . . Action 1  
• Copying under conditions other than the above . . . . . . . . . . . . Action 2  
DETAILS  
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you  
contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your  
machine.  
Action 1  
Action 1 is required when the machine prematurely stops copying and displays the  
Memory Overflow message after producing only one copied set, irrespective of the  
print quantity setting.  
1. Wait until the current operation is completed.  
The following Memory Overflow message is displayed on the touch screen, and all  
the data in memory is erased.  
If continuous working  
check output after copying  
2. Check the original pages, then position originals again.  
DETAILS  
Positioning the same number of originals may cause the memory overflow  
again. Arrange the original pages to lighten a burden to memory.  
3. Press [START] to complete the job.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) (continued)  
Action 2  
Action 2 is required when a job ceases with Memory Overflow messages displayed. In  
this case, the scanned data still remains in memory.  
Action 2 enables you to continue the job or suspend the job.  
1. Wait until the current operation is completed.  
The machine stops copying after producing one copied set irrespective of the set  
print quantity. When scanning in Store mode, however, the machine stops without  
producing a copied set.  
At this time, all the data still remains in memory, and the following Memory Overflow  
message is displayed on the touch screen.  
-Memory full-Start=>START key  
Cancel=>ST/CL key  
5
Trouble-  
2. Press [START] to continue copying.  
shooting  
The machine will output the scanned data for job completion in the amount remaining  
in the print quantity setting.  
Call for  
Service  
Preventive  
DETAILS  
To suspend the job, press [STOP/CLEAR] to save the job settings. All  
scanned data will be erased.  
Maintenance  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
Or, press [AUTO RESET] to clear the job and resume initial settings.  
JAM Key  
3. The following message displays.  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
If continuous working  
check output after copying  
Memory  
Overflow  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
All the data in memory will be erased with this message displayed.  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
4. Check the original pages, then press [START] to complete the job.  
Check pages of the output set to confirm the amount of missing data, then complete  
the job according to the print quantity remaining.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed  
When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen  
will be displayed.  
Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.  
1. Turn OFF the power switch.  
The main power switch does not have to be turned off.  
2. Wait about 10 seconds.  
3. Turn ON the power switch.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Tips  
COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON  
Fully insert paper trays.  
Close RADF.  
Check to be sure main power switch is ON.  
Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.  
COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT  
Manually adjust copy density to darker density.  
Check toner indicator and add toner, if required.  
Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high.  
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.  
Check the Density shift.  
COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK  
Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.  
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.  
Check the Density shift.  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS  
Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.  
Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean.  
Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area.  
Check density indicator and lighten if required.  
Call for  
Service  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING  
Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray  
capacity.  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF  
Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.  
Memory  
Overflow  
MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Image Shift and Reduce & Shift are incompatible with magnification.  
Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Image Shift or  
Reduce & Shift.  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
THE TOUCH SCREEN COPY SIZE INDICATOR DISPLAYS [!] ON THE TRAY  
The [!] symbol indicates that the paper loaded in the tray is inconsistent with the tray  
position setting.  
DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED  
Fully close ADU and RADF, then select Duplex mode again.  
COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING [START]  
Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for copy size selected.  
Close document cover firmly.  
Close front door completely.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)  
COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED  
Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.  
COPY QUALITY IS POOR  
Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary.  
THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER  
Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.  
Be sure originals are not stapled.  
Align originals evenly in the RADF.  
Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.  
COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED  
Be sure copy paper is inserted straight.  
USING ECM, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED  
Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed.  
Contact Key Operator to reset limit.  
FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE  
Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel.  
Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required.  
RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER [AUTO RESET] IS PRESSED  
Fully close RADF.  
RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING  
The document feeder is ready to accept originals.  
Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START].  
ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED  
New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.  
CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA  
Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.  
APS SELECTS THE WRONG COPY SIZE  
Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.  
IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE  
DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS  
Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size;  
otherwise, the [!] symbol will be displayed on the Copy Size indicator of the Basic  
Screen.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)  
THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN  
USER’S MANUAL  
Check with the Key Operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed.  
“PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL”  
This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the  
platen glass.  
Select copy size and press [START]. 1.00 magnification will be selected automatically.  
If this message continues to display after selecting copy size, select 1.00  
magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [START].  
If desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.00  
magnification in this situation.  
SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED  
Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in  
the locations designated for sheet insertion.  
Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right  
hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting  
screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page  
odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and  
the insertion sheet is odd.  
5
Trouble-  
shooting  
Call for  
Service  
Preventive  
Maintenance  
COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS  
Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray.  
Reload the copy paper upside down.  
Clearing  
Mishandled  
Paper  
JAM Key  
ADD PAPER  
Key  
Memory  
Overflow  
Power OFF/ON  
Screen  
Troubleshooting  
Tips  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Specifications  
Main Body & Option Specifications  
6
Main Body Specifications ........................................................................6-2  
Option Specifications ..........................................................................6-5  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Body Specifications  
Product Name Konica 7022/7130/7135  
Configuration Semi-console with stationary platen  
Photoreceptor OPC drum  
Method Laser Electrostatic  
Toner Black, cartridge type  
Recommended Operating Environment 50°~86°F (10°~30°C), 10~80% RH  
Warm Up Approx. 30 seconds @68°(20°C), 50% RH  
Auto Reset Off/30 sec./1 min./1.5 min./2 min./2.5 min./3  
min./3.5 min./4 min./4.5 min./5 min.  
First Copy Out Time From Platen Glass:  
7022/7130: 5 sec. for 8.5”x11”  
7135:  
4.2 sec. for 8.5”x11”  
Copy Rate 7022: 22 cpm: 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
18 cpm: 8.5”x11”R  
16 cpm: 8.5”x14”  
14 cpm: 11”x17”  
7130: 30 cpm: 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
20 cpm: 8.5”x11”R  
17 cpm: 8.5”x14”  
15 cpm: 11”x17”  
7135: 35 cpm: 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
21 cpm: 8.5”x11”R  
16 cpm: 8.5”x14”  
15 cpm: 11”x17”  
Continuous Copy 1~999 copies  
Voltage 120V/12A  
Frequency 60Hz  
Grounding Isolation recommended  
Power Consumption Max. 1,170 VA (full option)  
Noise Level (full system) Approx. 66 dB (A) or less, during copying  
Automatic Modes AMS, AES (plus 9-level manual density),  
APS detects 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R,  
8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
Magnification Presets: 0.50, 0.65, 0.77, 1.29, 1.55, 2.00  
3 User Sets - 0.25~4.00, set by key operator  
Zoom range -0.25~4.00 in 1% steps  
Originals on Platen Max. size: 11”x17” (280 mm x 432 mm)  
These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Body Specifications (continued)  
Originals in Document Feeder ADF mode: 1>1, 1>2  
11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R, 8.5”x11”,  
5.5”x8.5”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity  
RADF mode: 2>2, 2>1  
11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”R, 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”,  
5.5”x8.5”R  
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity  
Mixed mode:  
11”x17” + 8.5”x14” + 8.5”x11” + 5.5”x8.5”  
or 8.5”x14” + 8.5”x11”R + 8.5”x11” + 5.5”x8.5”  
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity  
Original weight:  
13~34 lb bond, curl max. 10 mm or less  
(Transparency, Paste-up, Offset master, Labels,  
& Intermediate papers unavailable)  
Paper Source Main body trays 1/2: 500 sheets each  
DB-210 trays 3/4: 500 sheets each  
DB-410 tray 3: 1,500 sheets  
Multi-sheet bypass tray: 50 sheets  
Main body trays 1/2 and DB-210 trays 3/4 user  
adjustable  
DB-410 tray 3 adjusted by service  
6
Machine  
Paper Exit Tray 100 sheets max.: 8.5”x11”R, 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5”R  
(20 lb)  
Specifications  
40 sheets max.: 11”x17”, 8.5”x14” (20 lb)  
Paper Weight 20 lb~24 lb bond recommended  
(Max. range: 16 lb~32 lb)  
OHP sheet, Transparency, Labels, Tab, 3-hole  
Main Body Safety Standard UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950 -95  
Radio Interference FCC Rules part 15, sub-part B Class A  
Options Finisher (FS-107)  
Inner Tray (IT-101)  
Drawer Base Unit (DB-210/DB-410)  
Desk (DK-109)  
Platen kit (CV-109)  
RADF (DF-314)  
Expanded Memory Unit (MU-403: 32MB)/(MU-  
404: 64MB)/(MU-411: 64MB)/(MU-405: 128MB)  
Fax kit (FK-102)  
Fax (FL-102)  
Image Processor (IP-011)  
Image Processor (IP-423): 7135  
Image Processor (IP-422): 7022/7130  
PostScript Unit (PS-345): 7135  
PostScript Unit (PS-343): 7022/7130  
Key Counter  
These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Body Specifications (continued)  
Machine Weight 158.7 lb (72 kg)  
+34.6 lb (15.7 kg) w/DK-109  
+57.3 lb (26 kg) w/DB-210  
+54.0 lb (24.5 kg) w/DB-410  
+20.9 lb (9.5 kg) w/RADF  
+28.7 lb (13 kg) w/Finisher (FS-107)  
+7.9 lb (3.6 kg) w/Inner tray (IT-101)  
Machine Dimensions Main Body (with RADF)  
Width: 22.8 in. (580 mm)  
Depth: 23.4 in. (595 mm)  
Height: 32.1 in. (815 mm)  
Document Feeder (RADF)  
Width: 22.4 in. (570 mm)  
Depth: 18.9 in. (480 mm)  
Height: 3.9 in. (100 mm)  
Max. open angle: 70 5°  
Stapler-Finisher (FS-107)  
Inside main body  
Width: 17.0 in. (432 mm)  
Depth: 18.2 in. (463 mm)  
Height: 10.0 in. (255 mm)  
Outside main body  
Width: 10.8 in. (275 mm)  
Depth: 19.6 in. (497 mm)  
Height: 15.4 in. (392 mm)  
Inner Tray (IT-101)  
Width: 16.9/22.9* in. (430/582* mm)  
Depth: 17.7 in. (449 mm)  
Height: 15.4 in. (392 mm)  
*: When the tray is extended.  
Drawer Base Unit (DB-210/410)  
Width: 22.8 in. (580 mm)  
Depth: 23.4 in. (590 mm)  
Height: 12.0 in. (304 mm)  
Desk (DK-109)  
Width: 22.8 in. (580 mm)  
Depth: 23.4 in. (590 mm)  
Height: 12.0 in. (304 mm)  
These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option Specifications  
Stapling Finisher (FS-107) Power source: Main body  
Exit tray: 2  
3 w/one FT-107  
4 w/two FT-107  
For exit tray capacity, see p. 9-3 to p. 9-4.  
Inner Tray (IT-101) Power source: Main body  
Exit tray: 2  
Capacity:Exit tray 1; 50 sheets max.  
Exit tray 2; 100 sheets max.  
Staple Cartridge 5000 staples/cartridge  
6
Machine  
Specifications  
These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced  
7
Advanced  
Information  
8
Applications  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Information  
How to Use Advanced Functions  
7
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) ....................................................7-2  
Rotation...............................................................................................7-4  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode ...............................................................7-6  
Weekly  
Timer  
Rotation  
Vertical/Hori-  
zontal Zoom  
7
Advanced  
Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer)  
The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by the Key  
Operator.  
This function is not factory-set. When a copier is under control of the Weekly Timer  
function, the Timer Interrupt mode message will be displayed after pressing the power  
switch, and copying is unavailable.  
However, copying can be available by using the following procedure.  
1. Press the power switch.  
HINT  
For details of the Weekly Timer function, see p. 11-31 to p. 11-39.  
The Basic screen will be displayed along with the message shown below.  
Timer interrupt mode  
Enter password  
DETAILS  
The machine power will be turned off automatically after 5 minutes from  
this state if a password is not entered.  
The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the Key  
Operator.  
In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key Operator,  
the following message will display instead.  
Input copy time  
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)  
When the above message displays, proceed to step 4.  
2. Enter the password.  
Enter a 4-digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) (continued)  
HINT  
For setting the Timer Interrupt password, see p. 11-39.  
DETAILS  
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit  
password.  
3. Press [START].  
The following message will be displayed on the Basic Screen.  
Input copy time  
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)  
4. Set the duration for the interrupt use.  
Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hours is 3) using the keypad on the control panel. (0 ~ 9)  
5. Press [START].  
Weekly  
Timer  
6. Set the minute for the interrupt use.  
Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the keypad on the control panel. (00  
~ 59)  
Rotation  
Vertical/Hori-  
zontal Zoom  
DETAILS  
Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5.  
7. Press [START].  
7
Copying is available until the set time is up.  
Advanced  
Information  
8. When Timer Interrupt of the copier is finished, press [POWER  
SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it.  
The copier returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotation  
This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original documents onto  
size 8.5"x11", irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction.  
DETAILS  
By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function. The Key Operator  
can set this function ON, or to operate when APS, AMS or reduce  
functions. See p. 11-42 to p. 11-46.  
Original  
Copy  
Original  
Copy  
Rotation copying  
Rotation copying  
8.5"x11"R  
11"x17"  
8.5"x14"  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"  
Normal copying  
Normal copying  
8.5"x11"  
8.5"x11"R  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"R  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"  
The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.  
Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.  
1. Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Output Mode Screen will be displayed.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotation (continued)  
2. Touch AUTO to deselect it.  
Output Mode Screen without Finisher  
Output Mode Screen with Finisher  
The Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will disappear to indicate that the Rotation  
function is canceled.  
To resume Rotation, touch AUTO to highlight it. The Rotation icon will be displayed  
on the Basic Screen.  
Weekly  
Timer  
Rotation  
Vertical/Hori-  
zontal Zoom  
7
Advanced  
Information  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode  
Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal  
dimensions, independently.  
>>>Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Specifications<<<  
❒ Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.25~4.00  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Repeat mode  
in Repeat  
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom.  
Length: 0.50, Width: 0.50  
Length: 1.00, Width: 0.50  
Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50  
Length: 4.00, Width: 0.50  
Length: 0.50, Width: 1.00  
Width  
Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00  
Length: 1.00, Width: 2.00  
Length: 2.00, Width: 2.00  
Length: 4.00, Width: 2.00  
Length: 0.50, Width: 4.00  
Length: 1.00, Width: 4.00  
Length: 2.00, Width: 4.00  
Length: 4.00, Width: 4.00  
Length: 1.00, Width: 1.00  
Length: 2.00, Width: 1.00  
Length: 4.00, Width: 1.00  
1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.  
The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)  
2. Touch the vertical zoom key on the popup menu to highlight it, then  
set the vertical zoom ratio.  
Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 3-digit vertical zoom ratio, or use arrow  
keys (c/d) to scroll to the desired ratio.  
Similarly, touch the horizontal zoom key to highlight it, then set the horizontal zoom  
ratio.  
Weekly  
Timer  
3. Touch OK.  
The popup menu disappears automatically and the specified zoom ratio will be  
displayed on the Basic Screen.  
Rotation  
Vertical/Hori-  
zontal Zoom  
4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
7
Advanced  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Information  
6. Position original(s).  
HINT  
See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
7. Press [START].  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)  
DETAILS  
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal  
zoom with an original placed diagonally on the platen glass.  
30  
Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00  
Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50  
30  
Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00  
Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Applications  
How to Use Application Functions  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
8
To Display Application Selection Screen .................................................8-2  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) .........................8-3  
Positioning Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)................................8-8  
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)....................8-11  
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) ............................8-14  
Copying onto Transparent Films (Transparency)...............................8-17  
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) .................................8-20  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) ...............8-23  
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) .....................................8-28  
Copying Folded Originals (Folded Original) ......................................8-31  
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Non-Standard Size) .................8-34  
Reverse the Second Side in 1-2 Mode (Upside Down).....................8-36  
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) ...........8-39  
Reversing Color in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) ...........8-42  
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)...............8-44  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) .........8-47  
AUTO  
Layout  
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) ....8-51  
Copying Image in the Center of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) ............8-54  
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ....................................8-57  
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce & Shift)..............8-60  
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) .....................8-63  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)...................8-66  
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) ......8-71  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Display Application Selection Screen  
Follow the procedure below to display the Application Selection Screen and select the  
desired copying features.  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
7022  
7130/7135  
The 7130/7135 Application Selection Screen provides OVERLAY as an additional function.  
DETAILS  
• When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch a  
function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter  
the appropriate settings.  
• If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear  
dimmed.  
• The indicator light on the [APPLICATION] key will be lit when application  
selections have been made.  
To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL.  
To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.  
2. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Selections will be completed and the Basic Screen will be restored.  
Reminder!  
With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START] to perform the  
operation.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or  
separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
>>>Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion<<<  
Chapter  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ Tray 1 is initially specified as the source of insertions and covers. If using the thick  
paper for front/back cover, select the Multi-sheet bypass tray for Front Cover  
insertion.  
AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically selected. The copy size  
in insertion tray and original size are detected, and the correct ratio will be  
automatically selected.  
❒ Max. insert sheets: 15 locations, from 1~999, including front and back covers  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotaion Group, Chapter,  
Combination, Booklet, Transparency, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original  
(Mixed Original), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-image Area Erase, Stamp (Page,  
Numbering)  
Combination  
Booklet  
❒
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
FRONT COVER COPIED  
FRONT COVER BLANK  
Mixed  
Original  
9 10  
9 10  
9 10  
7
9 10  
8
8
7
8
6
8
6
7
5
4
7
5
6
6
4
3
5
3
5
4
2
4
2
3
1
3
1
2
2
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Folded  
Original  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Originals  
Originals  
Copies  
Copies  
Upside Down  
BACK COVER BLANK  
BACK COVER COPIED  
9 10  
9 10  
9 10  
8
8
7
9
8
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
7
8
6
6
7
5
7
10  
6
5
4
6
5
4
3
5
3
2
4
2
1
4
3
3
2
1
2
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
Originals  
Originals  
Copies  
Copies  
BLANK SHEET INSERTION  
COPY SHEET INSERTION  
9 10  
9 10  
9 10  
8
9 10  
7
6
8
8
7
7
8
6
5
6
5
5
6
4
4
4
5
3
3
2
2
3
3
1
1
7
2
2
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
4
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
8
Applications  
Originals  
Originals  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
Copies  
Copies  
Combination samples:  
AUTO  
Layout  
FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED,  
AND COPY SHEET INSERTION  
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK,  
AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION  
Image Shift  
9 10  
9 10  
9 10  
8
8
9
8
7
7
7
8
6
6
5
6
6
5
4
5
4
5
3
10  
4
3
2
2
3
1
3
2
7
1
2
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
4
SURVEYOR’S  
Reduce &  
Shift  
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)  
1. Load insert/cover sheets into tray 1, and load regular sheets of the  
same size into copy paper tray source.  
DETAILS  
• When using thick paper for covers, load them in the Multi-sheet bypass  
tray.  
• Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions  
have the same paper size loaded.  
HINT  
The source of insertions and covers can be shifted from tray 1 to tray 2, 3,  
4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray by Key operator. See p. 11-42 ~ p. 11-46.  
2. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
3. Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen will be displayed.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
4. Select the cover sheet tray source.  
Touch TRAY1 for feeding from tray 1, or BYPASS for feeding from the Multi-sheet  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
bypass tray.  
If no cover is desired, proceed to step 6.  
Chapter  
5. Select the desired cover mode.  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Example: Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover.  
If no insertion is desired, proceed to step 8.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
6. Select the desired insertion mode.  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Example: Touch COPY INSERTION to insert copied sheets.  
Touch OK to display the Page Setting Screen.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)  
7. Enter the page number.  
Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of insertion location.  
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.  
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or press [# (CLEAR QTY.)]. The insertion  
location will be deleted.  
HINT  
See p. 8-7 for details on entering page numbers.  
Touch OK to complete the page setting and return to the Sheet/Cover Insertion  
Screen.  
8. When all settings are completed, touch OK to return to the Application  
Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
10.Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
11.Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers  
Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion  
location.  
The first (upper left) key displays the Front Cover icon if selected. The  
Back Cover icon appears, if selected, as the last (lower right) key.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted  
between p. 4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.  
NOTES:  
• Page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically.  
• Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the  
screen.  
• When a page number entered is larger than the total original page  
count, it will be ignored.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)  
Chapter is used with RADF in 1a2 or 2a2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages  
on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the  
presentation of double-sided copies.  
To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically  
created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.  
>>>Specifications for Chapter<<<  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ Max. title pages: 15 sheets, from 1 ~ 999  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: 1a1, 2a1, Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination,  
Transparency, Image Insert, Book Copy, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area  
Erase  
1-sided originals  
Copies in Chapter mode  
Title page  
2-sided originals  
Title pages  
8
8
7
6
7
5
4
4
5
3
6
2
3
1
2
1
1
Title pages  
Title page  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Chapter Page Setting Screen will be displayed.  
3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title  
page.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.  
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered number will be deleted.  
Repeat  
DETAILS  
• Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the  
screen.  
8
Applications  
• Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are  
entered out of sequence.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
• When a page number is larger than the total original page count,  
insertion occurs as the last page of the document.  
AUTO  
Layout  
OPTION  
Touch Booklet on the Chapter Page Setting Screen to use this function.  
To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch Copy  
Insertion on the screen.  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
4. When all entries are made, touch OK.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
8. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one  
sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
>>>Specifications for Combination<<<  
Chapter  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected.)  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image  
Insert, Book copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside  
Down), Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase  
Combination  
Booklet  
4 in 1 copying  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Original  
2 in 1 copying  
8 in 1 copying  
1
2
1 2 3 4  
5 6 7 8  
1
2
Mixed  
Original  
3
4
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
Upside Down  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
Reverse  
Image  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
Repeat  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
8
Applications  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued)  
2. Touch Combination on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Combination Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Select the desired Combination mode.  
Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1 or 8 in 1, and select a key in the LAYOUT area, referring to the  
illustration on the following page.  
4. Touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
AMS is automatically selected, and tray 1 is selected. When selecting any other tray,  
touch the desired tray key.  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
• For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
8. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Mixed  
Original  
DETAILS: Original Type and Layout Order  
Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode.  
Folded  
Original  
Horizontal order  
4 in 1  
Vertical order  
4 in 1 8 in 1  
Layout  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Original  
2 in 1  
8 in 1  
Portrait type  
Upside Down  
1
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4  
5 6 7 8  
1 3 5 7  
2 4 6 8  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
1
2
Reverse  
Image  
Landscape type  
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Repeat  
1
2
1
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)  
Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper  
from any tray. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged  
in booklet format in correct order.  
>>>Specifications for Booklet<<<  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode;  
otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.  
❒ AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size.  
❒ Original Size: 8.5”x11”, 5.5”x8.5” (16 ~ 32 lb).  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, 1a1, 2a1, Staple, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation  
Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Transparency, Special Original  
(Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Fold Erasure, AUTO  
Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Page, Numbering)  
..............  
1-sided originals  
48  
1
2
3
4
47  
..............  
Booklet copying  
2-sided originals  
48  
1
46  
3
26 23  
3
7
47  
1
5
45  
..............  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Booklet Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch to highlight the desired Booklet mode key.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
4. Touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
Select additional Applications, as desired.  
Repeat  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
8
Applications  
6. Select the 1a2 or 2a2 copy mode and the desired paper size.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AMS is selected automatically.  
To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper size.  
AUTO  
Layout  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)  
8. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
Reminder!  
Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-  
2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.  
9. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying onto Transparent Films (Transparency)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use the Transparency function in 1a1 or 2a1 mode to copy onto overhead projection  
transparent films, and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied  
transparent film.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
In the Blank sheet interleaving mode, a blank interleaf sheet is output with each  
transparent film to keep the film material from sticking together.  
In the Copy sheet interleaving mode, a copied interleaf sheet is output with each  
transparent film to provide reference during a presentation, a version for photocopying,  
and a set for filing or inserting into a binder.  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
>>>Specifications for Transparency<<<  
❒ Transparent film source: Multi-sheet bypass tray  
❒ Print quantity: 1  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
❒ Finisher cannot be used.  
❒ AMS is automatically selected.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, 1a2, 2a2, Sort, Staple, Group, Rotation Sort,  
Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image Insert, Special  
Original (Mixed Original), Repeat  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Blank sheets  
Copied sheets  
Transparent films  
Transparent films  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Transparent films  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
Original  
Transparency  
Blank Sheet Interleaving  
Copy Sheet Interleaving  
8
Applications  
1. Insert a sheet of transparent film into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
Reminder!  
Do not load transparent films into any other tray.  
AUTO  
Layout  
2. When interleaf sheet is needed, load copy paper in any other tray to  
Image Shift  
match the size of transparent films.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying onto Transparent Films (Transparency) (continued)  
3. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
4. Touch Transparency on the Application Selection Screen.  
5. Select the desired Transparency mode, then touch OK.  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying onto Transparent Films (Transparency) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
DETAILS  
• AMS is selected automatically.  
Chapter  
To release AMS, select the desired magnification.  
• Print quantity is already set to 1. You cannot enter any other quantity.  
Combination  
Booklet  
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
HINTS  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
8. Press [START].  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)  
Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such  
as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the  
document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set.  
The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the  
document feeder.  
>>>Specifications for Image Insert<<<  
❒ Use RADF and platen glass.  
❒ Max. image insert: 15 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter,  
Combination, Transparency, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-  
Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-image Area Erase  
1-sided originals  
placed on RADF  
8
7
6
8
7
5
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Insertion originals  
on platen glass  
2-sided originals  
placed on RADF  
7
5
7
5
4
3
1
1
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Image Insertion Page Setting Screen will be displayed.  
3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.  
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered page number will be deleted.  
Repeat  
HINT  
See p. 8-22 for detailed example.  
OPTION  
Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion Page Setting Screen to use this  
8
Applications  
function.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
4. When all page number entries are made, touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
AUTO  
Layout  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Image Shift  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)  
7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.  
If the number of originals exceeds 50, divide them into blocks not exceeding 50  
sheets and load them from the block with the first page.  
8. Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen.  
The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into memory.  
Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all originals.  
9. Scan the platen glass images.  
Open the document feeder. Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass,  
then close the document feeder.  
Reminder!  
PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION.  
10.Touch SCAN.  
Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.  
HINTS  
• Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-10 to p. 5-11.  
• Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you  
contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in  
your machine.  
11.Press [START].  
The copier will start printing when ready for output.  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers  
For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will  
be inserted as follows:  
The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2.  
The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first  
scanned image insertion.  
The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6.  
NOTES:  
• When a page number is larger than the total original count, a blank  
sheet is inserted as the last page.  
• Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of  
sequence.  
• Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that  
location.  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
The Book Copy mode performs image division on the original image. Use this function  
to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two 8.5”x11” sheets in 1a1 or 2a1 mode,  
or onto the front and back sides of one 8.5”x11” sheet in 1a2 or 2a2 mode.  
The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
• Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the first scan.  
• Front Cover + Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the second scan, after  
the first scan copies normally.  
Combination  
Booklet  
• Front/Back + Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after the  
first and second scan copy normally.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
>>>Specifications for Book Copy<<<  
❒ Store mode is automatically selected.  
❒ Original size: 11”x17”, 8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5”R  
NOTE:  
Originals are not limited in size, however, carefully select an appropriate  
magnification ratio and setting orientation when copying original size other  
than the above.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
❒ Copy size: 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R (use Rotation), 5.5”x8.5”R (use Rotation)  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination,  
Image Insert, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard  
Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Image Shift, Stamp  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Set original  
1a1 / 2a1 mode  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
1a2 / 2a2 mode  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) (continued)  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch Book Copy on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Book Copy Screen will be displayed.  
3. Select the desired Book Copy mode.  
Touch to highlight the desired mode key.  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
4. Select the desired scanning order according to the original pagina-  
tion.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
OPTION  
Touch Booklet on the Book Copy Screen to use this function.  
Chapter  
5. Touch OK.  
Combination  
Booklet  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
APS and AMS are automatically released, and the Store mode is automatically  
selected.  
7. Select the desired copy mode and magnification.  
Mixed  
Original  
DETAILS  
• When selecting Full scan mode and scanning from the platen glass,  
select 1a1 or 1a2 copy mode.  
• APS and AMS are released and 1.00 magnification is selected automat-  
ically. Change the magnification manually, if desired.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Reverse  
Image  
9. Position original(s).  
When using platen glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN with document  
feeder kept open.  
Repeat  
When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP.  
For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Full scan and Front/Back + Full  
scan mode, see the description on the following page.  
8
Applications  
10.Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.  
11.Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Reminder!  
When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are  
automatically selected.  
Image Shift  
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
12.Press [START].  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
The copier will start printing when ready for output.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) (continued)  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Scanning Original for Cover  
Use platen glass for scanning original for cover.  
1 Open the document feeder.  
2 Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the platen glass.  
3 Touch SCAN to start scanning.  
4 When Front/Back + Full scan is selected, scan original for back cover  
according to the above steps 2 and 3.  
5 Use platen glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body  
text originals.  
To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from  
the first page.  
6 Touch SCAN to start scanning.  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals.  
“Front Cover + Full Scan”  
9 10  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
Scan from  
first page  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Copies  
9 10  
“Front/Back + Full Scan”  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
1
Scan from  
first page  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Copies  
9 10  
8
7
“Front Cover + Full Scan”  
“Front/Back + Full Scan”  
6
5
4
3
2
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Copies  
9 10  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
SURVEYOR’S  
REPORT  
Copies  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) (continued)  
Application  
NOTES:  
Selection Screen  
• Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-10 to p. 5-11.  
• When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are  
automatically selected.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)  
Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy  
mixed size originals.  
Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or  
to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).  
>>>Specifications for Mixed Original<<<  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the RADF origi-  
nal guides. See p. 9-7 for details.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used),  
Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Booklet,  
Transparency, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Folded Original, Non-  
Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift,  
Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
APS mode  
Automatically  
select the paper  
of the same size  
as that of the  
original.  
AMS mode  
Automatically select  
magnification ratio  
to copy onto the  
Mixed size originals  
same paper in size.  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Special Original on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Special Original Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch Mixed Original.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
4. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.  
5. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
Repeat  
6. Select additional copying features, as desired.  
8
Applications  
DETAILS  
APS is automatically selected on the Basic Screen.  
To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired  
copy size.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Image Shift  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) (continued)  
8. Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• See p. 3-3 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
9. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Folded Originals (Folded Original)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use the Folded original mode with the document feeder to copy folded originals. Oth-  
erwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly.  
This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
>>>Specifications for Folded Original<<<  
❒ Use RADF.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed  
Original, Non-Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
Upside Down  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
Reverse  
Image  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
Repeat  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
8
Applications  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Folded Originals (Folded Original) (continued)  
2. Touch Special Original on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Special Original Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch Folded original.  
4. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.  
5. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
6. Select additional copying features, as desired.  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
DETAILS  
Normal originals can also be loaded at the same time.  
8. Position folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
• See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Folded Originals (Folded Original) (continued)  
9. Press [START].  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
CAUTION  
Chapter  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Non-Standard Size)  
Feeding special size originals through the RADF without selecting Non-standard size  
mode may cause the copier to stop scanning and mistakenly sense that the size  
detection sensor has malfunctioned or cause a paper misfeed.  
Using Non-standard size mode, the copier will search and copy onto the standard size  
copy paper that is closest to the original size.  
>>>Specifications for Non-Standard Size<<<  
❒ Use RADF. Platen glass is not available.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Store mode, Combination, Booklet, Image  
Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Upside  
Down), Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area  
Erase, Stamp  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch Special Original on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Special Original Screen will be displayed.  
8-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Non-Standard Size) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
3. Touch Non-standard Size.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
4. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.  
5. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
Mixed  
6. Select additional copying features, as desired.  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Upside Down  
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.  
HINTS  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
• See p. 3-2 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
Repeat  
9. Press [START].  
8
CAUTION  
Applications  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reverse the Second Side in 1-2 Mode (Upside Down)  
1-2 Upside Down arranges the even pages of simplex originals upside down on the  
reverse side of duplex copies.  
Similarly, 2-1 Upside Down rearranges the reverse sides of duplex originals which  
read upside down to make normal simplex copies.  
>>>Specifications for Upside Down<<<  
❒ 1-2 Upside Down functions only when 1-2 copy mode is selected.  
2-1 Upside Down functions only when 2-1 copy mode is selected and RADF is  
used.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Combination, Booklet, Book Copy, Special Original  
(Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-  
Image Area Erase  
1-2 Upside Down  
2-1 Upside Down  
3
2
1
Right/Left bound duplex originals  
Simplex originals  
1
3
2
2
3
1
Top/Bottom bound duplex originals  
Right/Left bound duplex copies  
1
3
2
2
3
1
3
2
1
Top/Bottom bound duplex copies  
Simplex copies  
8-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reverse the Second Side in 1-2 Mode (Upside Down) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
Chapter  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
Combination  
Booklet  
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Mixed  
Original  
2. Touch Special Original on the Application Selection Screen.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
The Special Original Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch 1-2 Upside down or 2-1 Upside down.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
The subsequent screen for selecting binding type will be displayed.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reverse the Second Side in 1-2 Mode (Upside Down) (continued)  
4. Touch the desired binding type key.  
Touch OK to restore the Special Original Screen.  
5. Touch OK on the Special Original Screen to return to the Application  
Selection Screen.  
6. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
7. Select additional copying features, as desired.  
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
When selecting 2-1 Upside down mode, use RADF to scan originals.  
HINTS  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
10.Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tones so that the copy quality  
more closely matches to that of the original.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Text Mode  
Chapter  
Use the Text mode when copying a text original. In this mode, text is improved in  
comparison to using the general mode.  
Combination  
Booklet  
Photo Mode  
Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely  
represent the half-tones of the original image.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Increase Contrast Mode  
Select Increase Contrast to darken lightly printed images (e.g., pencil) without  
changing background exposure. In cases where the image is light and background is  
dark, the background will not be changed.  
Mixed  
Original  
DETAILS  
In each enhance mode, the copy density level can be shifted three levels  
darker or three levels lighter (Density Shift) by the Key Operator setting.  
See p. 11-49 if this setting is desired.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
>>>Specifications for Text/Photo Enhance<<<  
❒ Incompatible Copying Conditions: None  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
Original  
Auto mode  
Photo mode  
8
Applications  
Original  
Auto mode  
Increase contrast  
mode  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Original  
Auto mode  
Text mode  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) (continued)  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch Text/Photo Enhance on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Text/Photo Enhance Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch TEXT, PHOTO, or INCREASE CONTRAST, as required.  
4. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.  
8-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
5. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
6. Select additional copying features, as desired.  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
HINTS  
• See p. 3-2 to p. 3-6 for details on positioning originals.  
• Use RADF store mode (p. 3-24 to p. 3-26) when the original count  
exceeds 50.  
Mixed  
Original  
9. Press [START].  
Folded  
Original  
CAUTION  
Non-Standard  
Size  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reversing Color in Black and White Image (Reverse Image)  
Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and  
vice versa. This is convenient for copying white-on-black originals and reversing them  
to fax.  
>>>Specifications for Reverse Image<<<  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase  
Original  
Reverse Image copying  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reversing Color in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Reverse Image on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.  
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Mixed  
Original  
4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Upside Down  
5. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
Reverse  
Image  
6. Press [START].  
Repeat  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Verti./Horiz. Mode)  
Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10mm ~ 150mm in both vertical  
and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the 11”x17” original area  
indicated on the left edge of the platen glass.  
>>>Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications<<<  
❒ Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, AMS, Sort, Staple, Group,  
Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination,  
Booklet, Transparency, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original,  
Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO  
Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode  
Repeat copy  
Horizontal width  
Vertical  
width  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Verti./Horiz. Mode) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch Verti./Horiz.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
The Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Screen will be displayed.  
Repeat  
4. Specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Use the up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150mm in 1mm increments.  
Hold the key to increase/decrease the value continuously.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Verti./Horiz. Mode) (continued)  
5. Touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
7. Select the desired magnification and copy size.  
DETAILS  
• APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected  
as a magnification ratio.  
• Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. When selecting 1a2 mode,  
Platen store mode will function automatically.  
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
9. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.  
HINT  
See the illustration on p. 8-44 for details.  
10.Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Auto Detection mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the  
original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase. Repeat  
mode will scan the image area specified by the selected copy size and mode (2  
Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by specified times in one  
copy sheet.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
>>>Auto Detection/ Repeat Mode Specifications<<<  
❒ Auto Detection Mode: Use the platen glass. RADF cannot be used.  
❒ Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.00 (100 %) fixed  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF (Auto Detection mode only), 2a2, 2a1,  
APS, AMS, Sort, Staple, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover  
Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Transparency, Image Insert, Book Copy,  
Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside  
Down), Reverse Image (Auto Detection mode only), Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO  
Layout, Image Shift, Stamp  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Auto Detection mode  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Copy  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Repeat mode  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
Copy  
(2 Repeat)  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
Copy  
(4 Repeat)  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Copy  
(8 Repeat)  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued)  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch AUTO or Repeat, as desired.  
When selecting Repeat, the Repeat Screen will be displayed.  
When selecting AUTO, proceed to step 5.  
8-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
4. Touch to highlight the desired mode key.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Touch 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat to select the desired Repeat mode.  
Touch OK to return to the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.  
5. Touch OK.  
Mixed  
Original  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
Folded  
Original  
DETAILS  
Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application  
Selection Screen when AUTO mode is selected.  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Reverse  
Image  
7. Select the desired magnification and copy size.  
Repeat  
DETAILS  
• APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected  
as a magnification ratio.  
• When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area  
will be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to  
the selected mode.  
In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.00 (100%).  
• Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. When selecting 1a2 mode,  
Platen store mode will function automatically.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
8. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Image Shift  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeating Automatically or Selecting Repeating Times  
(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued)  
9. Position original.  
For AUTO mode original, open the document feeder, then position the original FACE  
DOWN on the platen glass.  
For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, RADF is also available.  
HINT  
See the illustration on p. 8-47 for details.  
Reminder!  
When AUTO mode is selected, Non-Image Area Erase functions automatically.  
DO NOT close the document feeder.  
10.Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
DETAILS  
The AUTO mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place  
is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service repre-  
sentative about an appropriate place for installation.  
8-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean up and  
improve the presentation of the copy.  
Use Top/Bottom erasure mode to erase the black copy marks at the top and/or bottom  
of the copy image.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
>>>Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure<<<  
❒ Incompatible with Frame Erasure: Combination, Special Original (Non-Standard  
Size), Repeat  
Incompatible with Fold Erasure: Combination, Booklet, Book Copy, Special Origi-  
nal (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size), Repeat  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Top  
erasure  
Mixed  
Original  
Bottom  
Folded  
Original  
Frame  
Frame  
erasure  
Fold  
erasure  
erasure  
erasure  
Set original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
General copying  
Frame Erasure  
copying  
Fold Erasure  
copying  
Frame/Fold Erasure  
copying  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
8
HELP  
CHECK  
Applications  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
AUTO  
Layout  
STAR  
Image Shift  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) (continued)  
2. Touch Frame/Fold Erasure on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Select the desired erasure mode, then specify the erasure amount.  
Touch Frame Erasure or Fold Erasure to highlight it, then use arrow keys to select  
the desired erasure amount, from 1~15mm (Frame erasure) / 1~30mm (Fold  
erasure) in 1mm increments.  
Either Frame erasure and Fold erasure can be selected in combination.  
When selecting Top/Bottom erasure mode, touch Top/Bottom Erasure, then  
proceed to the next step.  
8-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
4. Top/Bottom erasure mode:  
Select the desired erasure mode, then specify the erasure amount.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Touch Top Erasure or Bottom Erasure to highlight it, then use arrow keys to select  
the desired erasure amount, from 1~100mm in 1mm increments.  
Either Top erasure and Bottom erasure can be selected in combination.  
Mixed  
Original  
5. Touch OK.  
Folded  
Original  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
Non-Standard  
Size  
6. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Upside Down  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
Repeat  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
8
Applications  
DETAILS  
When closing the document feeder on a thick original (e.g. open book), do  
not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
9. Press [START].  
Image Shift  
CAUTION  
Reduce &  
Shift  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Image in the Center of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)  
Use this function to detect the image area of the original and center the whole image  
on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper.  
>>>Specifications for AUTO Layout<<<  
❒ Use platen glass. RADF cannot be used.  
❒ Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected (can be released manually).  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, Sort, Staple, Group, Rota-  
tion Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet,  
Image Insert, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard  
Size, Upside Down), Reverse Image, Repeat, Image Shift, Stamp  
Auto Layout copying  
Set original  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Image in the Center of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch AUTO Layout on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.  
DETAILS  
• Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically.  
• When using the Book Copy with this function, the original smaller than  
the selected copy size will be printed in the center of the copy paper  
without image division performed.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Upside Down  
4. Select the desired magnification and copy size on the Basic Screen.  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
DETAILS  
• APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected  
as a magnification ratio.  
• Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. When selecting 1a2 mode,  
Platen store mode will function automatically.  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
8
Applications  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
AUTO  
Layout  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
Image Shift  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Reminder!  
DO NOT close the RADF when Non-Image Area Erase is selected.  
Placing original obliquely on the platen glass may cause black copy marks.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Image in the Center of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) (continued)  
7. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
DETAILS  
The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting is  
directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representa-  
tive about an appropriate place for installation.  
8-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose of creating  
a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift.  
See p. 8-60.  
Chapter  
>>>Specifications for Image Shift<<<  
Combination  
Booklet  
❒ Shift amount: -250 to +250mm in 1mm increments  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: 2a2, 2a1, APS, Booklet, Image Insert, Book Copy,  
Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat,  
AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Right  
Up  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Down  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Right  
Left  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Up  
Reverse  
Image  
Original  
Down  
Repeat  
Left  
Copies  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
2. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Image Shift Setting Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch Image Shift, then specify the shift amount.  
Use the up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from -250 to +250mm  
in 1mm increments.  
8-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
4. Touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Chapter  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Combination  
Booklet  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
Mixed  
Original  
8. Press [START].  
Folded  
Original  
CAUTION  
Non-Standard  
Size  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)  
Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss when creat-  
ing a binding margin.  
>>>Specifications for Reduce & Shift<<<  
❒ AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released.  
❒ Shift amount: -250 to +250mm in 1mm increments  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: 2a2, 2a1, APS, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special  
Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, AUTO  
Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp  
Left binding margin  
Right  
Left  
Up  
Down  
Front  
Back  
Front  
Right binding margin  
Left Right  
Up  
Down  
Originals  
Front  
Back  
Back  
Top binding margin  
Left  
Right  
Right  
Left  
Up  
Down  
Front  
Back  
8-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
Chapter  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
Combination  
Booklet  
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Mixed  
Original  
2. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
The Image Shift Setting Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch Reduce & Shift, then specify the shift amount.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Use the up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from -250 to +250mm  
in 1mm increments.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued)  
DETAILS  
The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to  
the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and  
magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically  
applied to the back page.  
4. Touch OK.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
6. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
8. Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
8-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such  
as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the platen  
glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
>>>Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase<<<  
❒ Use the platen glass only. Keep RADF open throughout the procedure.  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2a2, 2a1, APS, Sort, Staple, Group, Rota-  
tion Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet,  
Image Insert, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard  
Size, Upside Down), Reverse Image, Image Shift, Stamp  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Image Area Erase  
General copying  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Set original  
Upside Down  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
DATA  
Reverse  
Image  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
Repeat  
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
8
STAR  
Applications  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) (continued)  
2. Touch Non-image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen.  
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.  
3. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
4. Select magnification and copy size, as desired.  
DETAILS  
• APS and AMS are automatically released.  
• Copy mode is automatically set to 1a1. When selecting 1a2 mode,  
Platen store mode will function automatically.  
5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
6. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.  
Reminder!  
DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.  
Original size should be larger than 10mm x 10mm.  
7. Press [START].  
8-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
DETAILS: Oblique Erase and Rectangle Erase Modes  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
The Non-image area erase has two modes; Rectangle erase mode and  
Oblique erase mode. The copier is initially set to Oblique erase mode.  
Contact your service representative if you desire the Rectangular erase  
mode.  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Oblique erase mode  
Rectangle erase mode  
Mixed  
Original  
DETAILS  
Folded  
Original  
This function may perform incorrectly if the lighting is directly over the  
platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an  
appropriate place for installation.  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)  
This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of stamp, date/  
time, page number and numbering at the location designated on the screen, and to  
print the desired letter type obliquely in the center of the page (WATERMARK).  
The four stamp types and watermark provided on the Stamp Menu Screen can be used  
individually or in multiple combinations.  
>>>Specification for STAMP<<<  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Group (with NUMBERING), Rotation Group (with  
NUMBERING), Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size),  
Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase  
L-Top  
C-Top  
R-Top  
STAMP  
A
’00/10/10 10:30AM  
DATE/TIME  
2 / 5  
PAGE  
Z
002 / 005  
NUMBERING  
L-Bottom C-Bottom R-Bottom  
Printing positions  
WATERMARK  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
8-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
2. Touch STAMP on the Application Selection Screen.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
The Stamp Menu Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch ORIGI. DIRECT.  
The Original Direction Screen will be displayed.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Touch the key to match the originals to be copied, then touch OK to return to the  
Stamp Menu Screen.  
Repeat  
4. Touch to select the desired key.  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected stamp  
type.  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)  
5. When selecting WATERMARK: Specify the watermark type and  
pages to print on.  
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key on the screen.  
Touch Only first page to print the selected watermark on the first page only.  
When selecting STAMP: Specify the stamp type, printing position,  
and pages to print on.  
Touch to highlight the desired stamp type key on the screen.  
Touch POSITION to select the desired stamp position. See p. 8-70 for details.  
Touch Only first page to print the selected stamp on the first page only.  
When selecting DATE/TIME: Specify the date/time type, printing  
position, and pages to print on.  
Touch to highlight the desired date and time keys on the screen.  
Touch POSITION to select the desired stamp position. See p. 8-70 for details.  
Touch Only first page to print the selected stamp on the first page only.  
8-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
When selecting PAGE: Specify the PAGE type and printing position.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Touch to highlight the desired page type key on the screen.  
Touch POSITION to select the desired stamp position. See p. 8-70 for details.  
When selecting NUMBERING: Specify the numbering type, printing  
position, and pages to print on.  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key on the screen.  
Touch POSITION to select the desired stamp position. See p. 8-70 for details.  
Touch Only first page to print the selected stamp on the first page only.  
Repeat  
6. Touch OK.  
8
The Stamp Menu Screen will be restored.  
Applications  
Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired.  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
7. Touch OK on the Stamp Menu Screen.  
AUTO  
Layout  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
8. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
Image Shift  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Reduce &  
Shift  
9. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Stamp, Page, Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)  
10.Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN  
on the platen glass.  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
11.Press [START].  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
DETAILS: Print Position Selection Screen  
When POSITION is touched, the Print Position Selection Screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch to select the desired position key, then touch OK to return to the  
previous screen.  
8-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
This function is provided on the 7130/7135 Application Selection Screen.  
Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in  
the job.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
Chapter  
>>>Specification for Overlay<<<  
❒ Store mode is automatically selected.  
Combination  
Booklet  
❒ Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Sheet/Cover Insertion,  
Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Special Original (Mixed Original),  
Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp (STAMP, NUMBERING, WATER-  
MARK)  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Copies in Overlay mode  
Originals scanned  
1st scanned original  
2nd and later  
ABCD  
ABCD  
ABCD  
ABCD  
Mixed  
Original  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
1. Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel.  
DATA  
Reverse  
Image  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
Repeat  
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPION  
OUTPUT  
8
STAR  
Applications  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Reminder!  
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then  
press [AUTO RESET].  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (continued)  
2. Touch STAMP/OVERLAY on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.  
3. Touch OVERLAY.  
4. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.  
The Application Selection Screen will be restored.  
The Store mode is automatically selected.  
5. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
6. Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Basic Screen.  
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a  
magnification ratio.  
7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.  
HINT  
See p. 3-7 for details on setting print quantity.  
8-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (continued)  
Application  
Selection Screen  
8. Position the overlaying original.  
Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen  
glass.  
Sheet/Cover  
Insertion  
HINT  
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-6.  
Chapter  
Combination  
Booklet  
9. Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen.  
The original image will be scanned into memory.  
10.Position the original(s) to be overlaid.  
Transparency  
Image Insert  
Book Copy  
Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen  
glass.  
11.Touch SCAN to scan.  
Mixed  
Original  
12.Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all originals.  
13.Press [START] to print.  
Folded  
Original  
Non-Standard  
Size  
CAUTION  
When the finisher / paper exit / inner tray capacity is exceeded  
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as  
they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.  
Upside Down  
Text/Photo  
Enhance  
Reverse  
Image  
Repeat  
8
Applications  
Frame/Fold  
Erasure  
AUTO  
Layout  
Image Shift  
Reduce &  
Shift  
Non-Image  
Area Erase  
Stamp  
Overlay  
8-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and Original  
Information  
9
Paper Information ....................................................................................9-2  
Original Information.............................................................................9-6  
Paper  
Information  
Original  
Information  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Information  
This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper.  
• Tray 1 and 2 (Main body trays)  
• Tray 3 (DB-210/DB-410 Drawer Base Unit)  
• Tray 4 (DB-210 Drawer Base Unit)  
• Multi-sheet bypass tray  
Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies.  
• ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit)  
• Finisher (FS-107)  
• Inner Tray (IT-101)  
• Exit tray (for the machine without Finisher)  
Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each.  
Paper Weight  
Paper Trays  
Weight  
Tray 1 and 2 (Main body trays)  
Tray 3 (DB-210/410)  
Tray 4 (DB-210)  
20 ~ 24 lb  
16 ~ 32 lb  
Multi-sheet bypass tray  
Special (transparency film, labels, hole punch)  
Equipment  
ADU  
Weight  
20 ~ 24 lb  
Finisher  
16 ~ 32 lb  
Inner Tray  
Exit tray  
16 ~ 32 lb  
16 ~ 32 lb  
HINT  
See p. 11-30 for Paper Type setting of each tray.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Information (continued)  
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity  
Paper Trays  
Tray 1 and 2 (Main body tray)  
Tray 3 and 4 (DB-210)  
Tray 3 (DB-410)  
Capacity  
500 sheets (20 lb)  
500 sheets (20 lb)  
1,500 sheets (20 lb)  
Multi-sheet bypass tray  
50 sheets (20 lb)  
1 sheet each for special stock  
Equipment  
ADU  
Capacity  
Unlimited  
Finisher (FS-107)  
Inner Tray (IT-101)  
See the tables on the following page.  
50 sheets max. for Exit tray 1  
100 sheets max. for Exit tray 2  
Exit tray  
100 sheets max.: 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
40 sheets max.: 11"x17", 8.5"x14"  
Copy size/Paper type  
Thick/Thin  
Exit tray/Output mode  
8.5"x11",  
11"x17",  
8.5"x14"  
Non-standard  
size  
paper,  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"R  
Transparency  
Non-sort  
Sort  
Group  
100 sheets  
–
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Exit tray 1  
Exit tray 2  
100 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
–
–
50 sheets  
50 sheets  
–
Staple  
Non-sort  
Sort/Group  
Staple  
1,000 sheets  
1,000 sheets  
50 sets  
300 sheets  
300 sheets  
20 sets  
–
–
Paper  
Information  
Copy size/Paper type  
Original  
Information  
Thick/Thin  
Exit tray/Output mode  
Non-sort  
8.5"x11",  
11"x17",  
8.5"x14"  
Non-standard  
size  
paper,  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"R  
Transparency  
100 sheets  
–
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
Sort  
Exit tray 1  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
9
Paper &  
100 sheets  
–
–
Group  
Original Info  
Staple  
10 sheets  
Non-sort  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sort/Group  
Staple  
Non-sort  
Sort/Group  
Staple  
Exit tray 2  
Exit tray 3  
600 sheets  
600 sheets  
30 sets  
200 sheets  
200 sheets  
15 sets  
50 sheets  
50 sheets  
–
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Information (continued)  
Copy size/Paper type  
Thick/Thin  
Exit tray/Output mode  
Non-sort  
8.5"x11",  
11"x17",  
8.5"x14"  
Non-standard  
size  
paper,  
5.5"x8.5"R  
8.5"x11"R  
Transparency  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sort  
Exit tray 1  
Group  
100 sheets  
–
–
10 sets  
Staple  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Non-sort  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
Sort/Group  
Staple  
Non-sort  
Sort/Group  
Staple  
Exit tray 2  
Exit tray 3  
Exit tray 4  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
Non-sort  
Sort/Group  
Staple  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
100 sheets  
100 sheets  
10 sets  
10 sheets  
10 sheets  
–
Paper Size  
Paper Trays  
Available Sizes  
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
Tray 1  
(Main body tray)  
Tray 2  
(Main body tray)  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
Tray 3  
(DB-210)  
Tray 3  
(DB-410)  
8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, or A4R fixed  
(Service adjustable)  
Tray 4  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
(DB-210)  
Multi-sheet bypass  
tray  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Information (continued)  
Equipment  
Available Sizes  
ADU  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"*  
*Landscape orientation only.  
Finisher (FS-107)  
Exit tray 1:  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11",  
5.5"x8.5"R*  
Exit tray 2/3/4: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11",  
5.5"x8.5"R*  
*Non-sort mode only.  
Inner Tray (IT-101)  
Exit tray  
Exit tray 1/2: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11",  
5.5"x8.5"R  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R  
Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray  
Multi-sheet bypass tray accepts the following special paper type that cannot be loaded  
in the main body trays.  
Transparent film, labels, hole punched  
To Store Copy Paper  
• Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper  
misfeed.  
Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage.  
• Do not place paper packages vertically to store.  
Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed.  
Paper  
Information  
Original  
Information  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Original Information  
Use the platen glass or document feeder to position originals to copy.  
Platen Glass Originals  
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder,  
e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in  
generally poor condition.  
HINT  
See each description in this manual for copy conditions which cannot use  
the document feeder to scan.  
Unsuitable RADF Originals  
1
2
5
3
6
Paste-ups or  
cut-outs  
Curled, creased or  
folded originals  
Books  
4
Glossy or transparent  
originals, OHP film,  
art paper, cellophane  
Doubled, punched or  
stapled originals  
Thin or thick originals  
Platen Glass Original Specifications  
❒ Max. original size: 11”x17” (280mm x 432mm), sheet or book  
❒ Max. book weight/thickness: 15 lb [6.8 kg] / 1.2” [30mm]  
❒ Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass  
CAUTION  
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly  
when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF;  
otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Original Information (continued)  
RADF Originals  
Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (RADF) to scan  
originals.  
• Normal mode  
• Mixed Original mode  
• Folded Original mode  
Specifications for each mode are described as follows.  
Normal mode  
❒ Detectable original size:11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R,  
A4 (297mm x 432mm ~ 140mm x 216mm)  
❒ Original weight: 13 ~ 34 lb  
❒ Max. feeder capacity: 50 sheets (20 lb paper)  
❒ Curling tolerance: 10mm or less  
❒ Original placement: Face up, orientation same as copy paper  
Mixed Original mode  
Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. See p. 8-28 to p. 8-30 for details.  
❒ Original size:Two types of size combination are determined by the RADF guide width.  
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", and 5.5"x8.5"* mixed  
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", and 5.5"x8.5"* mixed  
*
5.5"x8.5" original is available in portrait type feeding only.  
❒ Original weight: 13 ~ 34 lb  
❒ Max. feeder capacity: 50 sheets (20 lb paper)  
❒ Curling tolerance: 10mm or less  
❒ Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-3 for details.)  
Paper  
Information  
Original  
Information  
DETAILS  
See below for the guide width of each combination.  
9
Paper &  
Original Info  
Guide  
width  
8.5"x  
11"  
Guide  
width  
5.5"x  
8.5"  
8.5"x11" 11"x17"  
8.5"x14"  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Original Information (continued)  
Folded Original mode  
Use Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size detection  
sensor of the RADF. See p. 8-31 to p. 8-33 for details.  
❒ Detectable original size:11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R,  
A4 (297mm x 432mm ~ 140mm x 216mm)  
❒ Original weight: 13 ~ 34 lb (no special stock)  
❒ Max. feeder capacity: 50 sheets (20 lb paper)  
❒ Curling tolerance: 10mm or less  
❒ Original placement: Face up; orientation same as copy paper  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance & Supplies  
How to Maintain the Copier  
10  
Adding Toner .........................................................................................10-2  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher.....................10-5  
Cleaning Image Scanning Section ........................................................10-9  
Cleaning Image Printing Section.....................................................10-12  
Checking Copy Count..........................................................................10-14  
Service, Repairs, Supplies ..............................................................10-15  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Toner  
When toner supply is low, the message “Please add toner” and the icon ( ) display  
on the touch screen.  
Reminder!  
Use the same number toner bottle as described on the label on the upper  
left side of the toner bottle cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur.  
Add toner according to the procedure as follows.  
1. Loosen toner by tapping both top and bottom of the new toner bottle  
on a solid surface at least five times, then shake the bottle at least  
five times.  
5~6cm  
5~6cm  
2. Open the machine front door, then unlock and open the toner bottle  
cover.  
3
1
2
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Toner (continued)  
3. Withdraw the toner bottle, then turn it clockwise to position the “Up  
arrow” mark at the top.  
2
1
4. Fully withdraw the toner bottle straight toward the front to remove  
the bottle.  
5. Remove the cap of the new toner bottle.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
1
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
2
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Toner (continued)  
6. Fully insert the new toner bottle until it locks into place, positioning  
the “Up arrow” mark at the top.  
Reminder!  
Be sure the “Up arrow” mark on the toner bottle is shown on the top; other-  
wise the toner bottle cannot be set properly.  
7. Close and lock the toner bottle cover, then close the machine front  
door.  
2
1
DETAILS  
The toner bottle cover cannot be locked if the toner bottle is not set in  
place.  
CAUTION  
Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-  
toxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident,  
flush with water and seek medical advice.  
CAUTION  
Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into  
a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher  
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.  
Reminder!  
Use only the staples supplied by Konica. To purchase, please contact your  
service representative.  
1. Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel to display the Output Mode  
Screen.  
DATA  
SCANNER  
/
PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
CHECK  
1
4
7
2
3
6
9
INTERRU  
5
8
0
APPLICATION  
OT  
STAR  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
2. Touch STAPLE SET to display the Staple Position Selection Screen.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
3. Touch ADD STAPLE.  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
The Moving Stapler Screen will be displayed while the stapler deeply positioned  
inside the finisher moves toward the finisher front door.  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher (continued)  
Reminder!  
DO NOT open the finisher front door while the Moving Stapler Screen is  
displayed; otherwise the stapler stops before completing the movement  
and cannot be reached to replace the staple cartridge.  
4. When the Check Stapler Screen is displayed, open the finisher front  
door.  
5. Push down the stapler cartridge lever to release the staple cartridge  
from the stapler.  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher (continued)  
6. Remove the empty staple case.  
7. Firmly insert the new staple case into the staple cartridge by aligning  
the arrow sides of both case and cartridge.  
8. Remove the holder tape holding staples in place.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-107 Finisher (continued)  
9. Insert the staple cartridge into the stapler and push it in securely.  
10.Close the finisher front door.  
11.Touch OK to return to the Output Mode Screen.  
12.Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning Image Scanning Section  
In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean.  
Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover  
Raise the document feeder/cover, and clean the glass with a clean soft cloth.  
The glass may also clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult  
to clean.  
If the machine is equipped with RADF, use an antistatic cleaner with a clean soft cloth  
to wipe up every day to ensure that a static charge is not generated.  
Reminder!  
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen  
glass.  
The document cover should be kept clean; otherwise, soil marks may be copied, or  
the original size cannot be detected correctly.  
Raise the document cover, and clean the inner surface of the document cover with a  
clean soft cloth.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
Reminder!  
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the docu-  
ment cover.  
& Supplies  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning Image Scanning Section (continued)  
Cleaning the RADF  
Cleaning the Left Partition Glass  
Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on  
the copies.  
Raise the document feeder, and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth.  
Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover  
The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be  
copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly.  
Raise the document feeder, and clean the RADF platen guide cover with a clean soft  
cloth.  
Reminder!  
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF  
platen guide cover.  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning Image Scanning Section (continued)  
Cleaning the RADF Roller  
Raise the document feeder, and clean the RADF roller with a clean soft cloth.  
You may also clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult to  
clean.  
Reminder!  
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF  
platen guide cover.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning Image Printing Section  
Cleaning the Writing Unit Glass and the Electrode Wires  
Keep the writing unit glass and the electrode (corona, transfer and separator) wires  
clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies.  
Follow the procedure below to periodically clean them.  
1. Open the machine front door.  
2. Withdraw and push in the writing unit glass cleaning knob and the  
corona wire cleaning knob, several times.  
3. Firmly push in these knobs, then close the machine front door.  
4. Open the right side door of the main body.  
5. Release the two hooks on the top edge of the conveyance unit cover  
6, then open its front cover.  
DETAILS  
If the hooks cannot be released easily, open the conveyance unit cover 6 to  
perform the following steps.  
In this case, use care not to touch the drum inside the conveyance unit  
cover 6, and quickly perform the cleaning procedure to close the cover as  
soon as possible; otherwise the drum may be damaged by a long period of  
exposure.  
WARNING  
The area near the conveyance unit cover 6 generates high  
voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT  
TOUCH!  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning Image Printing Section (continued)  
6. Push and slide the transfer/separator wire cleaning lever to the left  
and right, several times.  
2
4
3
1
7. Move the lever to the right until it stops, then close the front cover.  
8. Close the right side door of the main body.  
Adding Toner  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Copy Count  
This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on  
the touch panel: Total counter, Counter start date, FAX TX/RX counter (machine with  
the fax kit installed), Printer counter (machine with the IP kit installed), Scanner  
counter (machine provided with Scanner function), PM counter, Drum counter,  
Development counter, and Fixing unit counter.  
Check the count, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired.  
1. Press [✽ (COUNTER)] on the control panel.  
COP  
SCANNER / PRINTER  
FAX  
HELP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
INTERRUPT  
CHECK  
APPLICATION  
OUTPUT  
ST  
START  
CLEAR QTY.  
AUTO RESET  
The Counter List Screen will be displayed.  
To display to the PM Counter Screen, press [CHECK]. Touching the Up arrow key on  
the PM Counter Screen will resume the Counter List Screen.  
Counter List Screen  
PM Counter Screen  
2. Touch PRINT, if desired, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance, Repairs, Supplies  
Service  
Enter the name and telephone number of your Konica service representative, plus the  
machine serial number in the space provided below:  
______________________________________________________  
(Service Representative)  
______________________________________________________  
(Tel. No.)  
______________________________________________________  
(Machine Serial No.)  
Repairs  
When calling for repairs, be sure to have all necessary information at hand, such as  
the machine serial number and your own telephone number. If copy quality is the  
concern, bring a sample copy with you to the phone so that it can be described to your  
service representative.  
Enter the telephone number for Repairs in the space provided below:  
______________________________________________________  
(Repairs Tel. No.)  
Supplies  
Adding Toner  
Be sure to use only supplies recommended by Konica Business Technologies, Inc.  
To maintain your supply inventory, check your supplies at regular intervals, and order  
supply items before they are depleted or even nearly depleted.  
Inserting New  
Staple Cartridge  
Cleaning  
Scanning  
Section  
Enter the telephone number for ordering supplies in the space provided below.  
Cleaning  
Printning  
Section  
______________________________________________________  
(Supplies Tel. No.)  
Checking  
Copy Count  
Service, Repairs,  
Supplies  
The PCUA number for the Drum used in the 7022/7130/7135 copier is: 950253.  
No other Drum has been approved for use in this model.  
10  
Maintenance  
& Supplies  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Mode  
How to Monitor Copier Activity and Modify  
Machine Settings  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
How to Access the Key Operator Mode.................................................11-2  
[1] System Initial ..............................................................................11-4  
[2] Copier Initial....................................................................................11-7  
[3] Preset Key ................................................................................11-15  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) ...............................................11-18  
[5] Lock Job Memory....................................................................11-27  
[6] Paper Type....................................................................................11-28  
[7] Panel Contrast..........................................................................11-29  
[8] Key Operator Data........................................................................11-30  
[9] Weekly Timer ...........................................................................11-31  
[10] Touch Panel Adjustment.............................................................11-40  
[11] Power Save ............................................................................11-41  
[12] Memory Switch...........................................................................11-42  
[13] List Print.................................................................................11-47  
[14] Application Customize................................................................11-48  
[15] Density Shift...........................................................................11-49  
[16] KRDS Host.................................................................................11-50  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Access the Key Operator Mode  
The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not  
accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine  
performance, and service information, modifying machine settings, and controlling  
user activity, for billing purposes.  
A unique 4-digit Key Operator password is normally set by service at installation. If the  
unique code is not set by service, the copier will not display Key Operator Password  
Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed, and a Key Operator  
password will not be required. A service-set 8-digit ECM master key code must be  
entered by the Key Operator to access the Electronic Copy Monitor functions, and a  
service-set 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code must be entered by the Key Opera-  
tor to access the Weekly Timer functions.  
To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish  
a unique Key Operator password, along with the Key Operator ECM master key  
code and Weekly Timer master key code, and keep them in a confidential file.  
To Display the Key Operator Mode Screen  
1. Press [HELP] on the control panel to display the Help Screen.  
2. Touch Key-Ope mode on the Help Screen.  
3. Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Key Opera-  
tor password; then touch OK.  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Access the Key Operator Mode (continued)  
DETAILS  
If an invalid Key Operator password is entered, continue by entering the  
valid 4-digit password.  
If the Key Operator password is not valid, check with your service repre-  
sentative.  
4. Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as  
described on the following pages.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
DETAILS  
Paper Type  
• To scroll to menus [11] to [16], touch  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
.
.
Panel Contrast  
• The function number [16] KRDS host on the Key Operator Mode  
Screen will be dimmed and cannot be selected on a copier without the  
remote diagnostics activated.  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
5. Touch RETURN to exit the Key Operator mode.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
The Basic Screen will be restored.  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-3  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[1] System Initial  
Set the following initial conditions of the copier.  
• Time: Current date and time, summer time, difference in time  
• Language: Language used in LCD (English)  
[1] Time  
Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.  
❒ Default setting: Summer time off  
System Initial Setting Menu Screen  
Date & Time Setting Screen  
Difference in Time Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [1] System initial on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the System  
Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
2 Touch [1] Time to display the Date & Time Setting Screen.  
3 Adjust the time.  
The time that the copier currently has is displayed in the upper line, in the order of  
month, date, year, and time (in 24-hour expression).  
(1) Touch << or >> to move the cursor to the number to be changed.  
(2) Use the control panel keypad to enter the number.  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[1] System Initial (continued)  
4 To activate the summer time function, touch SUMMER TIME to highlight it. The  
Present time will gain an hour.  
5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference informa-  
tion at the same time when E-mail is received.  
To set this function, follow the procedure below.  
(1) Touch Diff. in time to display the Difference in Time Setting Screen.  
(2) Touch +/– to display “+” when the local time is earlier than Universal time, or “–”  
when the local time is later.  
(3) Touch << or >> to move the cursor to the number to be changed.  
(4) Use the control panel keypad to enter the time difference between Universal time  
and the local time in the machine setting area.  
(e.g. Enter “–0900” for 9 hours later than Universal time.)  
6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System  
Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-5  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[1] System Initial (continued)  
[2] Language  
Select the language used in the LCD.  
❒ Default setting: English  
System Initial Setting Menu Screen  
Language Selection Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [1] System initial on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the System  
Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
2 Touch [2] Language to display the Language Selection Screen.  
3 Select the desired language mode.  
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu  
Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial  
Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered  
on, when Auto/Reset timer is operated, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed.  
These settings can be changed by the Key Operator, as shown in this section.  
Initially (i.e., at installation), the Basic Screen displays the following conditions to meet  
Energy Star requirements:  
Initial Setting  
Copy Mode  
: 1-1  
Copy Density : AES  
Lens Mode  
Paper Tray  
: 1:1  
: APS  
Output Mode : offset sort  
Key Operator  
Mode  
When Initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the new initial settings display  
when the copier is powered on, when Auto Reset timer is activated, or when [AUTO  
RESET] key is pressed.  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
The following initial settings can be changed by the Key Operator:  
Copy mode  
: [RADF; 1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-1]  
Copy density : [AES; manual]  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Lens mode  
Paper tray  
: [AMS; ratio 0.25~4.00]  
: [APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray]  
Paper Type  
Output mode : [Exit tray 1, 2, 3, 4; Rotation On/Off; Non-sort, Sort,  
Group, Staple; Staple location] (machine with Finisher)  
[Exit tray 1, 2; Group, Rotation sort, Rotation group;  
Rotation On/Off] (machine with Inner tray)  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
[Group, Rotation sort, Rotation group; Rotation On/Off]  
(machine without Finisher)  
Weekly  
Timer  
Non-Image  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Area Erase : [Oblique erase, Rectangular erase; Original density]  
Power Save  
Setting procedures are described on the following pages.  
NOTE:  
Memory  
Switch  
The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before  
changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the  
overall and long-range effect of the change.  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-7  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
[1] Copy Mode  
Set Copy mode to occur after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.  
❒ Setting options: RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1  
❒ Default setting: RADF on, 1-1  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Screen  
Copy Mode Initial Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [2] Copier Initial on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Copier Initial  
Setting Screen, then touch 1. COPY MODE to display the Copy Mode Initial Setting  
Screen.  
2 Touch the setting you want for the initial condition of the copier.  
If 1-2, 2-2 or 2-1 mode is selected, RADF will also be selected, automatically. In this  
case, the RADF must be in a closed position when power is turned ON, or when Auto/  
Reset is functioning. Otherwise, the message “Please close RADF” will be displayed.  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
[2] Density  
Set Copy density to be effective after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.  
❒ Setting options: AES; manual  
❒ Default setting: AES on  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Copy Density Initial Setting Screen  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Procedure  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
1 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 2.  
Density to display the Copy Density Initial Setting Screen.  
Power Save  
2 Touch AES to select AES mode, or touch the density level required.  
Memory  
Switch  
Nine exposure levels are displayed.  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
List Print  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
Application  
Customize  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-9  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
[3] Magnification  
Set the magnification ratio you initially want to display after the user turns the power  
on or after Auto/Reset restores the Initial settings.  
NOTICE:  
This setting should not conflict with the Initial setting for Paper Tray. For  
example, if APS is selected for the initial paper tray setting, a ratio setting  
other than AMS will be ignored.  
❒ Setting options: AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25~4.00  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Screen  
Magnification Initial Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 3.  
Magnification to display the Magnification Initial Setting Screen.  
The default setting is 1.00.  
2 Select the desired setting from the Magnification Initial Setting Screen:  
To select 1.00 if it is not already displayed, touch 1.00.  
To select another ratio, touch upper/lower arrow key to display the desired ratio, or  
enter a 3-digit ratio using the keypad on the Control panel.  
To select AMS, touch AMS.  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
[4] Tray  
Set paper tray priority to be in effect after power is turned on or after Auto Reset  
occurs.  
This function sets tray priority, not paper size priority. Therefore, if paper size is  
changed in the tray, the tray will still remain the priority tray.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
The initial paper tray setting should not conflict with the initial setting for Lens Mode.  
For example, if the initial paper tray setting is APS, the initial setting for paper tray  
priority will be ignored.  
❒ Setting options: APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray  
❒ Default setting: APS on, no specified tray  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Screen  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Tray Initial Setting Screen  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-11  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
Procedure  
1 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 4.  
Tray to display the Tray Initial Setting Screen.  
2 Touch APS, or touch any tray key to select a specific tray.  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
[5] Output  
Set initial Output mode of the Finisher, Inner tray or exit tray to be effective after power  
is turned on or after Auto Reset occurs.  
Machine with Finisher  
❒ Setting options: EXIT Tray 1/ Tray 2/ Tray 3/ Tray 4; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/ Sort/ Group/  
Staple; Automatic Rotation on/off  
❒ Default setting: EXIT Tray 1; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort; Automatic Rotation ON  
Machine with Inner Tray  
❒ Setting options: EXIT Tray 1/ Tray 2; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/ Group/ Rotation sort/  
Rotation group; Automatic Rotation on/off  
❒ Default setting: EXIT Tray 1; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort; Automatic Rotation ON  
Machine without Finisher  
❒ Setting options: OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/ Group/ Rotation sort/ Rotation group; Automatic  
Rotation on/off  
❒ Default setting: OUTPUT MODE Non-sort; Automatic Rotation ON  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Output Mode Initial Setting Screen  
(machine with Finisher)  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
Output Mode Initial Setting Screen Output Mode Initial Setting Screen Staple Location Initial Setting Screen  
(machine with Inner tray)  
(machine with Finisher)  
Procedure  
Key Operator  
Mode  
1 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 5.  
Output to display the Output Mode Initial Setting Screen.  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
2 For the machine with Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to step 5.  
To select the exit tray, touch TRAY 1 or TRAY 2.  
To select the Output mode, touch SORT, GROUP, or STAPLE.  
NOTES:  
1. If STAPLE is selected, SORT is automatically highlighted.  
2. If selecting Non-sort mode, do not highlight any of the SORT, GROUP,  
or STAPLE.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
To select the desired staple location, touch STAPLE SET. Touch the desired location  
on the Staple Location Initial Setting Screen, and touch OK.  
Paper Type  
You can also select on/off of the Automatic rotation initial setting. To release the  
Automatic rotation mode, touch AUTO so that it is no longer highlighted.  
3 For the machine with Inner tray, perform the following operation and proceed to step 5.  
To select the exit tray, touch TRAY 1 or TRAY 2.  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
To select the Output mode, touch GROUP, ROTATION SORT, or ROTATION GROUP.  
You can also select on/off of the Automatic rotation initial setting. To release the  
Automatic rotation mode, touch AUTO so that it is no longer highlighted.  
Weekly  
Timer  
4 For the machine without Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to step  
5.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
To select the Output mode, touch GROUP, ROTATION SORT, or ROTATION GROUP.  
You can also select on/off of the Automatic rotation initial setting. To release the  
Automatic rotation mode, touch AUTO so that it is no longer highlighted.  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
List Print  
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
Application  
Customize  
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-13  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2] Copier Initial (continued)  
[6] Non-Image Erase  
Select the mode of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is  
selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Auto  
Reset occurs.  
❒ Setting options: Oblique erase, Rectangular erase; Original density Auto/Manual  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Copier Initial Setting Screen  
Non-Image Erase Initial Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 6.  
Non-image Erase to display the Non-Image Erase Initial Setting Screen.  
2 Touch Oblique erase or Rectangular erase, as desired.  
You can also select the original density level to obtain the optimum copy effect using  
this function. Touch AUTO, or select the density level required. Five exposure levels  
are provided.  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.  
If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[3] Preset Key  
Set two userset density levels and three USERSETs of magnification.  
[1] Density  
Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to  
Darker, then select the desired exposure and program it as USER1.  
The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER1 on the Basic  
Screen.  
Preset Key Setting Menu Screen  
Userset Density Selection Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Procedure  
Paper Type  
1 Touch [3] Preset key on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Preset Key  
Setting Menu Screen.  
Panel Contrast  
2 Touch [1] Density to display the Userset Density Selection Screen.  
3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the RADF.  
Key Operator  
Data  
4 Touch Userset1 or Userset2. The Userset Density Darker Setting Screen will be  
Weekly  
Timer  
displayed.  
5 To program Userset (1 or 2) to a darker level, perform the following operation, then  
proceed to step 7.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Userset Density Darker Setting Screen  
Power Save  
Touch No.1 1~4, No.2 5~8, No.3 9~12, or No.4  
13~16, then press [START]. The darker level  
sample sheet will be output.  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Select the desired darker exposure from the  
sample sheet(s), then touch the density number  
from 1 to 16.  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-15  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[3] Preset Key (continued)  
6 To program Userset (1 or 2) to a lighter level, perform the following operation, then  
proceed to step 7.  
Userset Density Lighter Setting Screen  
Touch Lighter to display the Userset Density  
Lighter Setting Screen.  
Touch No.1 1~4, No.2 5~8, No.3 9~12, or No.4  
13~16, then press [START]. The lighter level  
sample sheet will be output.  
Select the desired lighter exposure from the  
sample sheet(s), then touch the density number  
from 1 to 16.  
7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to  
the Preset Key Setting Menu Screen.  
8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator  
Mode Screen.  
9 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[3] Preset Key (continued)  
[2] Magnification  
The preset and userset ratios are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to  
accommodate copy paper size, and are available on the Basic Screen.  
NOTE:  
Normally, users are allowed to change the three USERSETs in the bottom  
line on the Userset Magnification Setting Screen. The preset keys in the  
top and middle lines can also be programmed in 2-5 DIPSW mode;  
however, changing them is not recommended.  
❒ Setting options:Userset or Preset ratio  
❒ Default setting: USERSET1: 4.00  
USERSET2: 2.00  
USERSET3: 0.50  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Preset Key Setting Menu Screen  
Userset Magnification Setting Screen  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Procedure  
Key Operator  
Data  
1 Touch [3] Preset key on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Preset Key  
Setting Menu Screen.  
Weekly  
Timer  
2 Touch [3] Magnification to display the Userset Magnification Setting Screen.  
3 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.25~4.00, using the  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
keypad.  
If a ratio under 0.25 is entered, 0.25 will be displayed.  
If a ratio over 4.00 is entered, 4.00 will be displayed.  
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Preset Key Setting Menu Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-17  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor)  
This function can only be accessed by the Key Operator after a 8-digit ECM master  
key code is entered. The Electronic Copy Monitor allows you to monitor all copying  
activity by controlling ECM password accounts.  
This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as  
limit access to the copier to authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific  
accounts can also be set. Use the ECM Key Operator Form provided at the end of this  
section to record ECM password information.  
The ECM stores up to 128 ECM passwords, each of which represents a separate  
account that can be used for billing and recordkeeping. The number of users assigned  
to each account may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of  
individuals and departments using the copier. When the ECM is activated, copying  
can be performed only after a valid ECM password is entered.  
Copy quantity and copy limit for each account can be visually confirmed on the  
screen.  
If ECM needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative.  
The following ECM settings can be made:  
1. Change E.C.M. Data:  
Create up to 128 individual ECM passwords, 00000~99999, and limit copy counts for  
each password to a max. 999,999 copies.  
2. E.C.M. Data List:  
Display the copy count for each ECM password, and change limit settings.  
3. All Counter Reset:  
Clear the copy count for all passwords.  
4. ECM On/Off Setting:  
Select the function to be on or off. The initial setting is Off.  
5. Copy Limit Reached Effect:  
Set the machine condition when the copy limit is reached. The machine can be set to  
stop immediately or after a job is completed, or to only display a warning message.  
11-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
How to Access the ECM Setting Mode  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
ECM Master Key Code Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Procedure  
Key Operator  
Data  
1 Touch 4. E.C.M. on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The ECM Master Key Code  
Screen displays, if a code is required.  
Weekly  
Timer  
2 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit ECM master key code, then  
touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen.  
NOTE:  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the  
valid 8-digit code.  
Power Save  
3 Select the desired ECM function, and make settings, as required.  
To exit the ECM mode, touch RETURN on ECM Setting Menu Screen.  
Memory  
Switch  
4 To exit the Key Operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to  
List Print  
restore the Basic Screen.  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-19  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
[1] Change ECM Data  
Assign an ID No. for an individual or for a group, then create individual password(s)  
for each user. You can specify a name and limit count for each password.  
❒ ECM ID No.: ID No. from 000~127, designated by key operator.  
❒ ECM Password: Unique 5-digit numeric code programmed by key operator for user.  
❒ User Name: max. 24 characters  
❒ Copy Limit: 0 to 999,999 copies  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
ECM Data Input Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 1. Change E.C.M. data on the ECM Setting Menu Screen to display the ECM  
Data Input Screen.  
2 ID No. key is highlighted, enabling you to  
immediately enter an ID No. Enter a 3-digit ID  
No. from 000~127 using the keypad on the  
control panel.  
3 Touch Password to highlight it. Enter a 5-digit  
ECM password using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
NOTES:  
1. Do not enter “00000”. The initial ECM password  
value is “00000”.  
2. We recommend that you make a list of all ECM  
passwords and ID Nos.  
4 Touch Name to display the Name Input Screen.  
If you do not specify the name, proceed to step 7.  
This operation can be completed normally  
without the name specified.  
5 Input desired name according to the procedure  
below.  
(1) Max. 24 characters can be entered.  
(2) Use Upper arrow and Lower arrow keys on  
the Name Input Screen to input uppercase  
and lowercase letters and symbols.  
11-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
(3) Touch DEL. to delete the input character  
from the last.  
(4) Touching CANCEL on the Name Input  
Screen will clear all the input characters.  
(5) To change the existing name, touch DEL. to  
delete it and enter the new name.  
6 Touch OK on the Name Input Screen to return to  
the ECM Data Input Screen.  
7 Touch Limit. Limit key will be highlighted,  
enabling you to immediately enter copy limit.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
8 Enter a 6-digit copy limit for the ID No. using the  
keypad on the control panel. The input copy limit  
will be displayed on the right of the copy count.  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
NOTES:  
1. If an invalid copy limit is entered, continue by  
entering the valid 6-digit copy limit.  
2. Entering “000000” signifies no copy limit.  
3. The Clear key, though it clears copy count, does  
not function on the ECM Data Input Screen.  
9 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to  
Lock Job  
Memory  
the ECM Setting Menu Screen.  
When the same ECM password has been used  
for another ID No., the Password Duplication  
Screen will be displayed. To re-enter new  
password, touch YES and return to the step 5.  
To create duplicate password, touch NO, then  
touch OK.  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
NOTE:  
It is possible to assign the same ECM password to  
different ID Numbers. Note, however, that the  
number of copies will be counted only for the ECM  
password with the smallest ID No. Copy count for the other ID Numbers will not be  
monitored.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM password.  
Memory  
Switch  
10 If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
11 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
List Print  
12 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Application  
Customize  
perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-21  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
[2] ECM Data List  
Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limit for each ID No., and to  
edit, add, and delete these ECM data.  
If the machine has the optional Fax kit and Printer Controller installed, the ECM Data  
Screen also allows you to check the facsimile transmission page count for each ID No.  
❒ Edit items: ECM password, Name, copy limit, copy count  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
ECM Data List Screen  
(COPY/PRINTER mode)  
ECM Data List Screen  
(FAX mode)  
Delete Confirmation Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 2. E.C.M. data list on the ECM Setting Menu Screen to display the ECM Data  
List Screen.  
If the machine is equipped with Fax kit and Printer Controller, the ECM Data List  
Screen in COPY/PRINTER mode will be displayed. To display the screen in FAX  
mode, touch the FAX key on the screen.  
2 To delete the ECM data, perform the procedure below.  
(1) Touch the c Upper arrow or d Lower arrow key on the right in the ECM Data List  
Screen to highlight the ECM data to be deleted.  
(2) Touch DEL. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed.  
(3) Touch Yes to delete, or touch No to cancel.  
11-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
3 To add the ECM data, touch ADD. The ECM Data Input Screen with invalid Clear key  
will be displayed. To input the ECM data, see p. 11-20 to p. 11-21.  
4 To edit the ECM data, touch the c Upper arrow  
or d Lower arrow key on the right in the ECM  
Data List Screen to highlight the ECM data to be  
edited, then touch EDIT. The ECM Data Edit  
Screen with valid Clear key will be displayed.  
(1) To edit the ECM password, touch Password.  
Enter a new 5-digit ECM password using the  
keypad on the control panel. Do not enter  
“00000”.  
(2) To edit the name, touch Name. The Name  
Input Screen will be displayed. See p. 11-21.  
(3) To edit the copy limit, touch Limit. Enter a  
new 6-digit copy limit using the keypad on the control panel. Entering “000000”  
signifies no copy limit.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
(4) To clear the copy count, touch Clear.  
5 Touch OK on the ECM Data Input Screen or the ECM Data Edit Screen to complete  
the settings and return to the ECM Data List Screen.  
To cancel the changes made in step 3 or 4, touch RETURN to restore the ECM Data  
List Screen.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
6 Touch RETURN on the ECM Data List Screen to restore the ECM Setting Menu  
Screen. If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
Paper Type  
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Panel Contrast  
perform copying operations.  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-23  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
[3] All Counter Reset  
Reset the count for all ECM password Nos.  
❒ Setting options: Reset All Counters yes or no  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
All Counter Reset Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 3. All counter reset on the ECM Setting Menu Screen to display the All  
Counter Reset Screen.  
2 Touch Yes to reset all counters to zero.  
Or, touch No not to reset. The selected key will be highlighted.  
3 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen. If  
other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
[4] ECM On/Off Setting  
Use this function to turn ECM ON or OFF. If the machine has the optional Fax kit and  
Printer Controller installed, set ECM ON or OFF individually for COPIER, FAX, and  
PRINTER mode.  
NOTE:  
If ECM OFF is selected while ECM functions, the copier will be enabled to  
perform copying jobs without an ECM password entered, and both copy  
count and copy limit functions will be discontinued.  
❒ Default setting: ECM on  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
ECM On/Off Setting Screen  
(machine without Fax kit and Printer Controller)  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
ECM On/Off Setting Screen  
(machine with Fax kit and Printer Controller)  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
Procedure  
List Print  
1 Touch 4. ECM On/Off setting on the ECM Setting Menu Screen to display the ECM  
Application  
Customize  
On/Off Setting Screen.  
2 Touch ON to activate ECM or touch OFF to de-activate ECM.  
The selected key will be highlighted.  
3 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen.  
If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-25  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[4] E.C.M. (Electronic Copy Monitor) (continued)  
[5] Copy Limit Reached Effect  
Use this function to select whether the copier will stop when the count limit is reached,  
or if the copier will complete the copy job before stopping when reaching maximum  
copy count.  
❒ Setting options: Immediately, After job, Warning  
❒ Default setting: After job  
ECM Setting Menu Screen  
Copy Limit Reached Effect Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch 5. Copy Limit Reached effect on the ECM Setting Menu Screen to display the  
Copy Limit Reached Effect Screen.  
2 Select setting option:  
Touch Immediately to stop the copier when the copy limit is reached.  
In this case, the paper in process will be completed, and the message “Enter ECM  
password” will display after the copier stops.  
Touch After job to stop the copier after the current job is completed.  
Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached.  
3 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen. If  
other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator  
settings are required, touch the desired key.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[5] Lock Job Memory  
Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed.  
A locked Job is indicated by a lock icon ( ) on the Lock Job Memory Screen.  
The settings of a locked job cannot be changed.  
❒ Setting options: Lock Job memory, Unlock Job memory, Delete Job memory  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Lock Job Memory Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Procedure  
1 Touch [5] Lock job memory on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Lock  
Job Memory Screen.  
2 To lock/unlock a job memory;  
Lock Job  
Memory  
(1) Touch the desired job number key to highlight it. Use arrow keys to scroll to the  
desired job number, if required.  
Paper Type  
(2) Touch Job Lock. The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the  
selected job is locked. The previously locked job will be unlocked when selected,  
and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear.  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
To delete a job memory;  
(1) Touch the job number you want to delete. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired  
job number, if required.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
(2) Touch DEL.  
Power Save  
Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the job memory.  
NOTES:  
Memory  
Switch  
• A locked job can also be deleted, with the lock on the job number  
released at the same time.  
• Once deleted, the programs cannot be restored.  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
3 Touch RETURN to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
4 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-27  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[6] Paper Type  
Use this function to indicate a specific paper type for each tray key on the Basic  
Screen. This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is  
always placed in a specific paper tray.  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Paper Type Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [6] Paper type on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Paper Type  
Setting Screen.  
2 Touch the desired paper tray to highlight it.  
3 Touch the c Upper arrow or d Lower arrow key to select paper type.  
The name of paper type displayed on the highlighted tray key will change as follows:  
--- (blank)  
!
RECYCL  
!
COLOR  
!
LTRHD  
!
SPCL.  
!
LABELS  
!
INVOIC  
!
LEGAL  
Touch the arrow keys until the desired name appears.  
4 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the  
Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[7] Panel Contrast  
Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the  
control panel, and also the volume of the touch key.  
NOTE:  
The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help Screen  
provided that the feature setting is activated by service. When the Control  
panel contrast key is pressed, the Contrast adjustment screen will be  
displayed. Contact your service representative if the feature is required.  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Panel Contrast Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Procedure  
Lock Job  
Memory  
1 Touch [7] Panel contrast on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Panel  
Contrast Screen.  
Paper Type  
2 Adjust the Panel contrast and Backlight contrast, as desired.  
Touch DARK, NOR., or LIGHT to make the panel or backlight contrast dimmer or  
brighter than the current condition.  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
3 Touch RETURN to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
4 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Weekly  
Timer  
perform copying operations.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-29  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[8] Key Operator Data  
Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Operator  
indicated on the Help Screen selected from the Basic Screen.  
❒ Setting options: 8-digit Key Operator telephone extension; Max. 20-character Key Operator  
name  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Key Operator Data Input Screen  
Name Input Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [8] Key ope. data on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Key  
Operator Data Setting Screen.  
2 Touch Name to display the Name Input Screen, then enter the Key Operator name up  
to 20 characters from the touch screen keypad.  
NOTE:  
For details of Name Input Screen, see p. 11-20.  
3 Touch For Assistance to highlight it, then enter a 8-digit extension number from the  
control panel keypad.  
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer  
This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly  
Timer master key code is entered.  
The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the  
machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch  
breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required.  
In Addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement)  
to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the  
Timer function.  
Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer:  
• The power plug is inserted into the socket.  
• The power switch is turned on.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
• The current date and time are correctly set.  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
If the Weekly Timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service rep-  
resentative.  
The following Weekly Timer settings can be made.  
[1] Weekly Timer Setting  
Enable and disable the Timer function.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
[2] Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set  
Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or  
the entire week.  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
[3] Machine Working Day Individual Set  
Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through  
Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the given month.  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
[4] Lunch Hour Off Function  
Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on.  
Power Save  
[5] Password Setting  
Memory  
Switch  
Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of  
usage time.  
NOTES:  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
1 The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [1] is the first  
hour after midnight and hour [24] is the hour of midnight. For example, 6  
a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours.  
2 The [AUTO RESET] key is used to change numbers determined by the  
SET touch key.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-31  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays when the 4-digit Weekly Timer  
master key code is set by service.  
Otherwise, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen displays without the code  
requirement.  
2 If the Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the  
touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to  
display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.  
NOTE:  
If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering  
the valid 4-digit code.  
3 Select the desired Weekly Timer function, and make settings, as required.  
4 To exit the Weekly Timer mode, touch RETURN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu  
Screen.  
5 To exit the Key Operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to  
restore the Basic Screen.  
11-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
[1] Weekly Timer Setting  
❒ Default setting: Weekly timer OFF  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Procedure  
1 Touch [1] Weekly timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen.  
2 Touch YES to activate Weekly Timer, or touch NO to de-activate Weekly Timer. The  
selected key will be highlighted.  
The selected key will be highlighted.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu  
Screen.  
Paper Type  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Panel Contrast  
perform copying operations.  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-33  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
[2] Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set  
Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the  
week or set the block time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day.  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen  
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Block Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [2] Weekly timer Copier ON/OFF time set to display the Weekly Timer On/Off  
Time Setting Screen.  
2 Use the procedure below to set the ON time and OFF time for the desired days of the  
week.  
(1) Touch EDIT to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Block Setting Screen.  
(2) Touch and highlight the keys of the desired day of the week from Monday through  
Sunday to set the same ON time and OFF time.  
(3) Touch ON to enter the ON time.  
Enter a 2-digit ON-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a 2-digit ON-minute (ex. 7 min. is 07)  
using the control panel keypad.  
(4) Touch OFF to enter the OFF time.  
Enter a 2-digit OFF-hour (ex. 6 p.m. is 18) and a 2-digit OFF-minute using the  
control panel keypad.  
11-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
NOTES:  
• If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on.  
• Be sure to enter both ON time and OFF time.  
• Be sure to enter the ON/OFF time for a day off also, so that you can  
specify the machine working days on the Weekly Timer Working Day  
Individual/Collective Setting Screen.  
(5) Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Weekly Timer On/Off Time  
Setting Screen.  
(6) Confirm the ON time and OFF time on the screen.  
3 Use the procedure below to delete the ON time and OFF time of the day of the week.  
(1) Use the c Upper arrow and d Lower arrow keys to select the day of the week to be  
deleted.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
(2) Touch DEL.  
(3) ON time and Off the of the day of the week are delted and “--:--” are displayed.  
NOTE:  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
On the day of the week with the ON/OFF time deleted, you can not turn on  
the power.  
4 Touch RETURN to complete the settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu  
Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Lock Job  
Memory  
perform copying operations.  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-35  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
[3] Machine Working Day Individual Set  
Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the  
On/Off condition for specific days; or set it collectively, for all Mondays through  
Sundays of the given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through  
Saturdays, and Off for Sundays.  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
W.T. Working Day Individual Setting Screen  
W.T. Working Day Collective Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1
Touch [3] Machine working day individual set to display the W.T. Working Day  
Individual Setting Screen.  
The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen, with timer-  
active days highlighted.  
2 To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day, touch the key for that day to  
change its indication.  
To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month.  
3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week, touch  
Collective Set to display the W.T. Working Day Collective Setting Screen.  
Touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day. If you touch an already-highlighted key,  
no change will occur.  
Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the W.T. Working Day Individual  
Setting Screen.  
11-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
NOTE:  
The selected days will be highlighted in black on the W.T. Working Day  
Individual Setting Screen when restored, however, the working day  
individual setting has priority so that you can make setting change for each  
day on that screen, if desired.  
4 Touch RETURN to complete the settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu  
Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-37  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
[4] Lunch Hour Off Function  
The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use this Lunch  
hour off function to shut down power for lunch break then turn on again while the  
copier is turned on due to the Weekly Timer function. The only one off time interval  
can be programmed.  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [4] Lunch hour off setting to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen.  
2 Use the procedure below to activate the Lunch hour off function.  
(1) Touch Function ON to highlight it.  
(2) Touch off-time.  
Enter a 2-digit off-hour (ex. 9 a.m. is 09) and a 2-digit off-minute (ex. 7 min. is 07)  
using the control panel keypad.  
(3) Touch on-time.  
Enter a 2-digit on-hour and a 2-digit on-minute using the control panel keypad.  
3 Touch Function OFF to de-activate the Lunch hour off function. The time setting area  
will appear grayed out and cannot be selected.  
The Function OFF setting is the factory default setting.  
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu  
Screen.  
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9] Weekly Timer (continued)  
[5] Password Setting  
Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using  
Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be  
interrupted without the requirement for password entry.  
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen  
W.T. Interrupt Password Setting Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Procedure  
1 Touch [5] Password setting to display the W.T. Interrupt Password Setting Screen.  
2 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4-digit password, and then touch OK to  
Lock Job  
Memory  
complete the setting.  
NOTE:  
Paper Type  
When the password setting is 0000, timer interrupt can be used simply by  
turning the copier OFF, then ON.  
Panel Contrast  
3 Touch RETURN to return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
Key Operator  
Data  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Weekly  
Timer  
perform copying operations.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-39  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[10] Touch Panel Adjustment  
Use this feature to check malfunctions of the LCD touch screen due to the shift in  
position of the touch sensor.  
❒ When the Control Panel Adjustment Screen does not display in step 2, press one from the  
control panel keypad [0] ~ [9].  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Touch Panel Adjustment Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [10] Touch panel adj. on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Touch  
Panel Adjustment Screen.  
2 Touch the “+” indication at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the screen.  
The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen.  
NOTE:  
When touching the “+” indications, it is recommended that you use a sharp  
point such as a pencil to be more accurate.  
3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message  
area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line.  
4 Touch the CHECKs at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if  
the buzzer tone functions normally.  
5 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3, or the buzzer  
tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from 2 to 4.  
6 Press [START] on the control panel to complete the setting.  
11-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[11] Power Save  
Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off  
become activated. Or, select the Auto Shut Off function to ON or OFF.  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Power Save Timer Setting Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Auto Shut Off ON/OFF Setting Screen  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Procedure  
Weekly  
Timer  
1 Touch [11] Power Save on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Power Save  
Timer Setting Screen.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
2 Touch the timer key in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating  
the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off.  
NOTES:  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto  
Shut Off setting.  
2 If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low  
Power, the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.  
List Print  
3 Touch NEXT on the Timer Setting Screen to display the Auto Shut Off ON/OFF Setting  
Application  
Customize  
Screen.  
4 Touch ON to activate Auto Shut Off, or touch OFF to deactivate it. The default setting  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
is ON.  
5 Touch RETURN to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen.  
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-41  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[12] Memory Switch  
This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. See pp. 11-  
44~11-46 for details on Memory Settings.  
SW No.  
Item  
Setting (default is underlined)  
No. 01: Auto reset timer  
OFF / 30 sec. / 60 sec. / 90 sec. / 120 sec./  
150 sec. / 180 sec. / 210 sec. / 240 sec. /  
270 sec. / 300 sec.  
Full-Auto / Initial  
RADF / RADF+Auto Reset  
ON/ APS/AMS only  
None / 1mm / 2mm / 3mm / 4mm / 5mm  
OFF / ON  
No. 02: AUTO RESET effect  
No. 03: Load RADF effect  
No. 04: Non Image A. Erase  
No. 05: RADF frame erasure  
No. 06: Auto tray switch  
No. 07: Platen APS  
OFF / ON  
No. 08: RADF APS  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
No. 09: ATS/APS (Bypass)  
No. 10: ATS/APS SW (Tray 1)  
No. 11: ATS/APS SW (Tray 2)  
No. 12: ATS/APS SW (Tray 3)  
No. 13: ATS/APS SW (Tray 4)  
No. 14: Platen AMS  
No. 15: RADF AMS  
OFF / ON  
OFF / ON  
OFF / Low / High  
OFF / ON  
Tray 1 / Tray 2 / Tray 3 / Tray 4 / Bypass  
Landscape / Portrait  
No. 16: Staple mode reset  
No. 17: Key click sound  
No. 18: Job memory recall  
No. 19: Sheet insertion  
No. 20: 5.5x8.5 orig.type  
No. 21: Rotation  
OFF / ON / APS/AMS/Reduce  
only / APS only  
/
APS/AMS  
No. 22: 1 SHOT indication  
No. 23: AUTO START  
No. 24: No- printing timer  
No. 25: Power save key  
No. 26: Bypass tray size  
1 sec. / 2 sec. / 3 sec. / 4 sec. / 5 sec.  
OFF / ON  
OFF / 15 sec. / 30 sec. / 60 sec. / 90 sec.  
Power Save / Shut Off  
Standard size / Non standard size  
11-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[12] Memory Switch (continued)  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Memory Switch Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Memory Switch Screen 2  
Memory Switch Screen 3  
Memory Switch Screen 4  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Procedure  
Paper Type  
1 Touch [12] Memory SW on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Memory  
Switch Screen.  
Panel Contrast  
2 Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting.  
(1) Touch the arrow keys c and d at the right on the Memory Switch Screen to select  
the desired item.  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
(2) Touch the arrow keys  
(3) Touch EDIT to change the setting of the highlighted item.  
?
and  
@
at the lower left to scroll the screen.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
(4) Repeat above steps (1) to (3) to make several changes in succession.  
3 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
Power Save  
4 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Memory  
Switch  
perform copying operations.  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-43  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[12] Memory Switch (continued)  
The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings.  
[1] Auto reset timer  
Sets the time interval for the machine to reset to the initial condition.  
Options: Off or 30/60/90/120/150/180/210/240/270/300 seconds.  
[2] AUTO RESET effect  
Sets the condition of Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, and Paper tray  
selection when the [AUTO RESET] key is pressed.  
Options: Full-auto (factory setting) or Initial (key operator setting). Initial is the default  
setting.  
[3] Load RADF effect  
Determines how the machine initializes when it is in the platen copy mode (non  
RADF) and an original is inserted in the RADF feed tray.  
Options: RADF and RADF + Auto Reset. The RADF option will activate the RADF  
without resetting any other features. The RADF + Auto Reset option will activate the  
RADF and reset the machine to the features programmed in memory switch #2.  
[4] Non Image Area Erase  
Establishes how the machine determines the image area of the copy.  
Options: ON and APS/AMS only. ON option limits the copy image area to that of the  
original. The APS/AMS only option limits the copy image area to that of the copy  
paper sizes and the magnification automatically selected by the machine.  
[5] RADF frame erasure  
Sets the amount of frame erase when using the RADF.  
Options: None, 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm.  
[6] Auto tray switch  
During a copy job when ATS is on and multiple paper trays are loaded with the same  
size paper, the machine will automatically switch to another tray when the initial tray  
runs out of paper. Refer to memory switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for  
each tray.  
[7] Platen APS  
This feature allows the machine to automatically detect the size of the original placed  
on the glass and select the same size copy paper. Refer to switches 9 through 13 to  
activate this feature for each tray.  
[8] RADF APS  
This feature allows the machine to detect the size of the original fed through the  
RADF. Refer to switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for each tray.  
11-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[12] Memory Switch (continued)  
[9] ATS/APS (Bypass)  
This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Multi-sheet bypass.  
[10] ATS/APS SW (Tray 1)  
This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 1.  
[11] ATS/APS SW (Tray 2)  
This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 2.  
[12] ATS/APS SW (Tray 3)  
This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 3.  
Key Operator  
Mode  
[13] ATS/APS SW (Tray 4)  
This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 4.  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
[14] Platen AMS  
This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio  
when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is placed on the platen  
glass.  
[15] RADF AMS  
Lock Job  
Memory  
This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio  
when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is fed from the RADF.  
Paper Type  
[16] Staple mode reset  
When copying in the sort/staple mode, this setting allows the machine to automatically  
reset to non-staple mode when the job in progress is completed.  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
[17] Key click sound  
Weekly  
Timer  
When this feature is Low or High, the machine activates a buzzer sound when the  
touch sensitive screen is touched or any key is pressed. This confirms the machine  
recognition of the selection.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
[18] Job memory recall  
This feature allows the machine to initialize using selections stored in job memory  
Memory  
Switch  
No.15 when the power is turned on or the [AUTO RESET] key is pressed.  
NOTE:  
List Print  
This function works only when job memory No.15 is registered.  
Application  
Customize  
[19] Sheet insertion  
This setting allows selection of tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, or Bypass as the source of  
the inserted sheets.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-45  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[12] Memory Switch (continued)  
[20] 5.5x8.5 orig. type  
Selects orientation of 5.5x8.5 size originals.  
Options: Landscape or portrait.  
[21] Rotation  
When turned on the feature allows the machine to automatically rotate an 8.5”x11”  
original image to match the manually selected paper size. For example, if an original  
is placed in the RADF or on the platen glass in the 8.5”x11”R position and the 8.5”x11”  
paper size is selected, the machine will rotate the image to fit the 8.5”x11” paper.  
[22] 1 SHOT indication time  
Determines the duration of messages that are displayed, i.e., 50 SHEETS MAXIMUM  
IN STAPLE MODE. Options: 1/ 2/ 3/ 4 or 5 seconds.  
[23] AUTO START  
This feature allows the machine to start the copying operation as soon as the  
document feeder/platen cover is closed down over the platen original.  
[24] No-printing timer  
Set the timer to allow the printing job to start after operating the copying job.  
[25] Power save key  
Select the power saver mode to be activated by pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]  
key.  
[26] Bypass tray size  
Select the paper size detectable on the Multi-sheet bypass tray.  
11-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[13] List Print  
Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.  
• Job memory list:Programmed contents of Job memory  
• User setting list: Machine information managed by ECM and home position settings  
selected by user  
• Font pattern:  
Font patterns used in the machine  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
List Print Screen  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Procedure  
1 Touch [13] List Print on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the List Print  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Screen.  
2 Touch the desired item on the screen to highlight it.  
3 Touch OK to print out the desired list.  
Paper Type  
To suspend printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].  
Panel Contrast  
After completion of printing, the copier will automatically return to the List Print Screen.  
When printing other lists, select the key and touch OK.  
Key Operator  
Data  
4 Touch CANCEL to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
Weekly  
Timer  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Power Save  
Memory  
Switch  
List Print  
Application  
Customize  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-47  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[14] Application Customize  
Use this function to rearrange, display, or hide the application keys on the Application  
Selection Screen.  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Application Customize Screen  
Item Selection Screen  
File Edit Customize Screen  
Image Edit Customize Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [14] Appli. customize to display the Application Customize Screen.  
The application function keys currently set are displayed on the screen.  
When setting change is desired, touch EDIT to display the Item Selection Screen.  
2 Touch FILE EDIT or IMAGE EDIT, as desired.  
3 On the File/Image Edit Customize Screen, touch to highlight the desired application  
function key on the right, then touch ADD. Selected key will move to the left part of the  
screen, while the key on the right will be dimmed to show inactivity.  
4 To cancel the selection you made, touch to highlight the desired key on the left, then  
touch DEL. The selected key will disappear.  
Touch Pre-set to restore the previous setting.  
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Item Selection Screen.  
Touch another item key, if desired, or touch Initialize to restore the factory setting.  
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Application Customize Screen. Confirm the setting you  
made on this screen.  
7 Touch OK to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[15] Density Shift  
Density shift divides each of nine density levels into two levels of lighter and three  
levels of darker when used in combination with Text/Photo Enhance.  
Density shift selection can be made in each of four Text/Photo Enhance modes; Text/  
Photo (general), Text, Photo, and Increase Contrast.  
❒ Setting options: Density shift 0/ 1/ 2/ 3 (standard)/ 4/ 5  
Density shift 0  
Density shift 1  
Density shift 2  
Key Operator  
Mode  
System Initial  
Copier Initial  
Preset Key  
E.C.M.  
Density shift 3  
Density shift 4  
Density shift 5  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
Density Shift Setting Screen  
Lock Job  
Memory  
Paper Type  
Panel Contrast  
Key Operator  
Data  
Weekly  
Timer  
Touch Panel  
Adjustment  
Procedure  
1 Touch [15] Density Shift to display the Density Shift Setting Screen.  
Power Save  
2 Select the Text/Photo Enhance mode.  
Memory  
Switch  
Touch Text/Photo, TEXT, PHOTO, or Increase contrast to highlight it, then enter the  
desired density shift (from 0 to 5) using the Control panel keypad.  
3 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
List Print  
4 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
Application  
Customize  
perform copying operations.  
Density Shift  
KRDS Host  
11-49  
11  
Key Operator  
Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[16] KRDS Host  
When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by a  
Konica service representative. In case of machine trouble, select the KRDS host  
option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate  
means for resolving the problem.  
❒ Setting options: Call for JAM; SC; No toner; No paper; Copy quality; Other reason  
Key Operator Mode Screen  
KRDS Host Menu Screen  
Start Call Screen  
Procedure  
1 Touch [16] KRDS host to display the KRDS Host Menu Screen.  
2 Touch 1. JAM concerns, 2. SC concerns, 3. NO TONER, 4. NO PAPER, 5. COPY  
QUALITY, or 6. OTHER REASON, as required.  
The Start Call Screen will be displayed.  
3 Touch START to call remote service representative.  
4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.  
5 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to  
perform copying operations.  
11-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Automatic Tray Switching (ATS) vii  
AUTO RESET effect 11-44  
Auto Reset Mode vii  
symbol  
[#] (CLEAR QTY.) key 2-8, 3-7  
[✽] (COUNTER) key 2-8, 10-14  
[ ! ] symbol 2-15  
B
Basic Screen 2-6  
Blank sheet interleaving 8-17  
Book Copy 8-23  
Number  
1 SHOT indication time 11-46  
1.00 Magnification mode 3-12  
1-2, 2-2 copying 3-18  
1-2 Upside Down 8-36  
2-1 copying 3-22  
Booklet 8-14  
C
Call for Service 5-2  
CAUTION 1-3  
2-1 Upside Down 8-36  
2 in 1 8-11  
Caution labels and indicators 1-2  
Change ECM Data 11-20  
Changing Paper Size 2-19  
Chapter 8-8  
CHECK key 2-8, 3-41  
Check Mode 3-41  
2 Repeat 8-47  
4 in 1 8-11  
4 Repeat 8-47  
5.5x8.5 orig. type 11-46  
8 in 1 8-11  
8 Repeat 8-47  
Clearing Mishandled Paper 5-5  
Combination 8-11  
Control panel 2-8  
Conveyance unit cover 2-4  
Copier Initial 11-7  
Copy density 3-16  
COPY INSERTION key 8-5  
COPY key 2-8  
Copy Limit Reached Effect 11-26  
Copy Mode 3-18, 11-8  
Copy sheet interleaving 8-17  
Copy Size 3-8  
Corona wire cleaning knob 2-4, 10-12  
Counter List 10-14  
COUNT/SET indicator 2-6  
A
ADD PAPER indication 5-9  
ADD STAPLER key 10-5  
ADD TONER icon 2-6, 10-2  
Add toner message 10-2  
Adding Toner 10-2  
ADU 2-4  
ALL CLEAR key 8-2  
All Counter Reset 11-24  
AMS key (-A-) 3-10  
Application Customize 11-48  
APPLICATION key 2-8, 8-2  
APS key 3-8  
ATS/APS SW 11-45  
AUTO Layout 8-54  
Auto Low Power 2-12  
D
DANGER 1-3  
AUTO RESET key 2-8  
Auto reset timer 11-44  
Auto Shut-Off 2-12  
Auto tray switch 11-44  
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES) 3-16  
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) 3-10  
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) 3-8  
DATA indicator 2-8  
Density (Initial) 11-9  
Density (Preset) 11-15  
Density Shift 11-49  
Developing unit 2-4  
Document cover 10-9  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
E
I
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) 11-18  
ECM Data List 11-22  
Icon area 2-6  
Image Insert 8-20  
ECM ID No. 11-20  
Image Shift 8-57  
ECM Master Key Code 11-19  
ECM On/Off Setting 11-25  
ECM password 2-14, 11-18  
ENGLISH key 11-6  
Increase Contrast Mode 8-39  
Initial Setting 11-7  
Inner tray 3-38  
Installation Space 1-7  
INTERRUPT indicator 3-44  
INTERRUPT key 2-8  
Interrupt Mode 3-44  
Exit tray 1-11  
F
FAX key 2-8  
J
FCC Regulations 1-4  
FDA Regulations 1-4  
Finisher 2-2  
Finisher conveyance unit 2-4  
Finisher knob 2-4  
JAM key 5-7  
JOB LIST key 2-6, 3-29  
Job List Screen 3-29  
Job Memory 4-2  
Finisher mode icon 2-6  
Fixing unit guide 2-4  
Folded Original 8-31  
Font pattern 11-47  
JOB MEMORY key 4-2  
Job memory list 11-47  
Job memory recall 11-45  
Job No. icon 2-7  
For Assistance key 11-30  
Frame/Fold Erasure 8-51  
Front/Back + Full Scan mode 8-23  
FRONT COPY key 8-5  
Front Cover + Full Scan mode 8-23  
Front door 2-2  
FS-107 Finisher 2-2, 3-34  
FT-107 Finisher Tray 2-5  
Full Scan mode 8-23  
Job Recall 4-6  
Job Store 4-2  
K
Key click sound 11-45  
Key counter 2-2  
Key-Ope mode key 4-9, 11-2  
Key Operator Data 11-30  
Key Operator Mode 11-2  
Key Operator Password 11-2  
Keypad 2-8  
G
Group mode 3-31, 3-34, 3-38  
GUIDE key 5-5, 5-7  
KRDS Host 11-50  
L
H
Landscape type original 8-13  
Language 11-6  
LCD touch screen 2-8  
Left partition glass 10-10  
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble 5-3  
List Print 11-47  
HELP key 2-8, 4-8  
HELP MENU key 4-8  
Help Mode 4-8  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Load RADF effect 11-44  
Loading Paper 2-15  
Lock icon 4-4, 11-27  
Platen glass 3-5  
Platen Store Mode 3-24  
PM CALL icon 2-6  
Lock Job Memory 11-27  
Lunch Hour Off Function 11-38  
PM counter 10-14  
Portrait type original 8-13  
Positioning Originals 3-2  
Power OFF/ON Screen 5-12  
Power Save 11-41  
POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 2-8  
Power switch 2-2, 2-9  
Preset ratios 3-13, 11-17  
Preset Key 11-15  
M
Machine Working Day Individual Set 11-36  
Magnification (Initial) 11-10  
Magnification (Preset) 11-17  
Main power switch 2-2, 2-9  
Memory indicator 2-6  
Memory Overflow 5-10  
Memory Switch 11-42  
Preventive Maintenance (PM) 5-4  
Proof Copy 6-29  
PROOF COPY key 3-42  
Message area 2-6  
Mixed Original 8-28  
Multi-sheet bypass tray 2-2  
R
RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) 2-2  
RADF AMS 11-45  
RADF APS 11-44  
RADF frame erasure 11-44  
RADF platen guide cover 10-10  
RADF roller 10-11  
RADF Store Mode 3-24  
RE key 3-13  
N
Non-Image Area Erase 8-63, 11-44  
Non-image erase 11-14  
Non-sort mode 3-31, 3-34, 3-38  
Non-Standard Size 8-34  
O
Rectangular erase mode 8-65  
Oblique erase mode 8-65, 11-14  
Optional Equipment 2-5  
Output (Initial) 11-12  
OUTPUT key 2-8  
Output Mode 3-31, 3-34, 3-38  
Reduce & Shift 8-60  
Regulations 1-4  
Repeat 8-44, 8-47  
Requirements for Safe Use 1-5  
Reserve 3-27  
RESERVE key 2-6, 3-27  
Reverse Image 8-42  
Right side door 2-2  
Rotation 7-4, 11-46  
Rotation group mode 3-31, 3-38  
Rotation icon 2-6  
P
Panel Contrast 11-29  
Paper Indicator 2-15  
Paper jam position display 5-5  
Paper Type 11-28  
Rotation sort mode 3-31, 3-38  
Paper Weight 9-2  
Password Setting 11-39  
PCUA number 10-15  
Photo Mode 8-39  
Platen AMS 11-45  
Platen APS 11-44  
Platen cover 2-2  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
S
V
SCAN key 2-6  
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom 7-6  
SCANNER/PRINTER key 2-8  
Maintenance, Repairs, Supplies 10-15  
SETTING key 2-6  
Setting Print Quantity 3-7  
Sheet/Cover Insertion 8-3  
Sort mode 3-34  
Special Original 8-29  
Stamp 8-66  
Standard Equipment 2-5  
Staple cartridge 10-5  
Staple mode 3-34  
W
WARNING 1-3  
Weekly Timer 11-31  
Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set 11-34  
Weekly Timer Function 7-2  
Weekly Timer Master Key Code 11-32  
Weekly Timer Setting 11-33  
Work table 2-2  
Writing unit glass cleaning knob 2-4, 10-12  
Staple mode reset 11-45  
STAPLE SET key 10-5  
START key 2-8  
STOP/CLEAR key 2-8  
Store Mode 3-24  
Z
ZOOM key 3-14  
Zoom Mode 3-14  
SUMMER TIME key 11-4  
System Initial 11-4  
T
Text Mode 8-39  
Text/Photo Enhance 8-39  
Time 11-4  
Timer Interrupt mode 7-2  
Toner bottle 10-2  
Toner bottle cover 2-4  
Total count 10-14  
Touch Panel Adjustment 11-40  
Transfer/Separator wire cleaning lever 2-4, 10-13  
Transparency 8-17  
Tray (Initial) 11-11  
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity 9-3  
Troubleshooting Tips 5-13  
U
Unsuitable RADF Originals 9-6  
Upside Down 8-36  
User Name 11-21  
User setting list 11-47  
USERSET 1, 2, 3 (Magnification) 11-17  
Userset 1, 2 (Density) 11-15  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Konica Business Technologies, Inc.  
500 Day Hill Road Windsor, CT 06095  
Telephone (860) 683-2222  
OP-7022/7130/7135-02  
Printed in China  
August 2002  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Washer WI 101 User Manual
Infinity Stereo System 11cs User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid PH904A User Manual
John Deere Pressure Washer AC 3500GHH User Manual
Kalorik Slow Cooker usk sc 24752 User Manual
Kenwood Speaker KFC 1071 User Manual
KitchenAid Beverage Dispenser KUWO24LSBX01 User Manual
KitchenAid Ice Maker 2313715A User Manual
KitchenAid Ventilation Hood 30 762 cm 36 914 cm 48 1219 cm Wall Mount Canopy Range Hood User Manual
Konftel Cordless Telephone 300IP User Manual